Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual

PDF

Документ

8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount
Computer
User Manual
November 4, 2005
ISO 9001 Certified
Quality Management System
Part No. 8100038.B
&copy; Copyright 2005 by Psion Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario
This document and the information it contains is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc.,
is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in
part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured
goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for
design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests
of Psion Teklogix Inc.
All trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Return-To-Factory Warranty
Psion Teklogix provides a return to factory warranty on this product for a period of
twelve (12) months in accordance with the Statement of Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability provided at www.psionteklogix.com/warranty. (If you are not
already a member of Teknet and you attempt to view this warranty, you will be asked
to register. As a member of Teknet, you’ll have access to helpful information about
your Psion Teklogix products at no charge to you.) In some regions, this warranty
may exceed this period. Please contact your local Psion Teklogix office for details.
For a list of offices, see Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices. The
warranty on Psion Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product
that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an
employee of an authorized Psion Teklogix service organization. See Psion Teklogix
terms and conditions of sale for full details.
To ensure prompt warranty service in North America, please register the serial
number of this device to activate its warranty coverage by contacting Psion Teklogix at 1-800-835-5644 ext. 209, or via web-link [email protected]. Failure to do so could affect Psion Teklogix’ ability to effectively
service, repair, or support this device.
Service
When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the
failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred.
Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any products to Psion Teklogix, please call the Customer Services Group for a Return Authorization number.
Support Services
Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers. For detailed information, please refer to Appendix A: Support Services And
Worldwide Offices. This section also provides information about accessing support
services through the Psion Teklogix web site.
Disclaimer
Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-date.
In addition, changes are periodically added to the information herein; these changes
will be incorporated into new editions of the publication.
Psion Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make improvements and/or changes in the
product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this document without notice, and
shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential
damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to
typographical errors.
TABLE
Program License Agreements . .
Approvals And Safety Summary
OF CONTENTS
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .VII
Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
About The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer .
8525/8530 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1 8525 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . .
8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer And Keyboard. .
1.6.1 8530 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 3
. 4
. 4
. 4
. 7
. 8
. 10
. 11
Preparing The 8525/8530 For Operation . . . . . .
8525/8530 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .
8525/30 Freezer And Outdoor Guidelines . . . . .
2.3.1 Important Operating Instructions . . . . . .
Switching On The Unit &amp; Configuring The Radio .
2.4.1 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio . . . . .
2.4.2 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Name Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks .
2.4.4.2 Deleting A Preferred Network. . .
2.4.4.3 Changing Network Properties . . .
Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 15
. 15
. 16
. 16
. 17
. 19
. 24
. 25
. 26
. 26
. 26
. 27
. 27
. 27
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
i
Contents
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Features Of The 8525/8530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Internal Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching The 8525/8530 On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys. . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 8525/8530 Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.1 PWR/CHG – Charge LED . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.2 RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.3 Scan LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.4 API – User Application LED. . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners . . .
3.8 Connecting &amp; Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals . . . . . .
3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Connecting An 8525/8530 To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Using Microsoft&reg; ActiveSync&reg; To Work With Files .
3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525/8530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
37
37
38
38
39
40
40
40
40
41
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
48
49
49
49
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
4.1
ii
Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus . . . . . . . . . . 53
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Contents
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard. . .
Working With Files, Folders And Programs
The Startup Desktop. . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar. . . . .
4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar .
The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Shutdown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using A Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 54
. 55
. 55
. 56
. 57
. 57
. 57
. 58
. 59
. 59
. 62
. 63
. 64
. 65
. 65
. 66
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 71
. 71
. 71
. 72
. 76
. 76
. 77
. 77
. 78
. 79
. 79
. 80
. 81
. 82
. 84
. 86
. 88
. 89
. 89
Chapter 5: Configuration
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . .
Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . .
The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.1 Display Background . . . .
5.5.1.2 Display Appearance . . . .
5.5.1.3 Display Backlight . . . . .
5.5.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.1 Key Repeat. . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . .
5.5.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes
5.5.2.4 Keyboard Macro Keys. . .
5.5.2.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . .
5.5.2.6 Scancode Remapping . . .
5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties. . . .
5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments. . . .
5.5.4 Power Management Properties. . . .
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
iii
Contents
5.5.4.1 Power Suspend . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.2 Card Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.1 Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity. . . . .
5.5.5.2 Touchscreen Calibration . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.3 Options – Disabling The Touchscreen .
5.5.6 Certificate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Narrow Band Radio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Channel Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Protocol Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 Power Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 Radio Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 The Devices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 The Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2.1 Outgoing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Active Conn. Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 The Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.5 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 IPv6 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Scanner Properties Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.1 Scanner Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2 Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.1 Non-Decoded Options . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.2 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.3 Code 128 Settings . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.4 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.5 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.6 UPC A Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.7 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.8 Codabar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.9 Code 93. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.10 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 90
. 91
. 91
. 92
. 92
. 93
. 93
. 94
. 94
. 98
. 102
. 105
. 106
. 108
. 109
. 112
. 112
. 113
. 114
. 115
. 120
. 120
. 124
. 124
. 127
. 128
. 128
. 129
. 130
. 131
. 133
. 134
. 136
. 136
. 137
. 137
. 138
. 138
Contents
5.11.2.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.13 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.14 IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3 Decoded (External). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3.1 Tether Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3.2 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.4 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Setup
5.12.1 Communities Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.1.1 Adding A Community . . . . . . . . .
5.12.1.2 Modifying A Community Setting . . .
5.12.1.3 Removing An Existing Community . .
5.12.2 Trap Destination Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.2.1 Enabling Authentication TRAPS . . .
5.12.2.2 Adding A Destination . . . . . . . . .
5.12.2.3 Changing A Destination . . . . . . . .
5.12.2.4 Removing A Trap Destination. . . . .
5.12.3 Permitted Hosts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.3.1 Adding A Host. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.3.2 Changing A Host . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
138
139
139
140
141
141
142
143
144
146
147
147
148
148
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
157
157
157
157
158
158
159
159
160
161
161
162
162
162
162
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
The Tekterm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Keyboard Functions. . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys. . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys . . . . . . .
6.2.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing The Screen Font Size. . . . . . . . . . . .
Panning The Screen Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications
The Tekterm Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TESS Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions . . . . . . .
6.7.3 The Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys. . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
v
Contents
6.7.5 Data Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement . . . .
6.7.5.2 [DEL] Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . .
6.7.5.3 [BKSP] Key Behaviour In TESS. . . . . . . . .
6.7.6 TESS Status Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.7 Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.8 Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.10 The Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.12 Queuing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8 ANSI Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys. .
6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5 Working With Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5.1 Establishing A New Session . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions
6.8.5.3 Closing A Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5.4 Printing A Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9 The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11 Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus . . .
6.11.1.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.1.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.1.3 Y/N Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.1.4 Alpha Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.1.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus . . . .
6.11.2.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.3 Y/N Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.2.4 Alpha Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 163
. 164
. 165
. 166
. 167
. 168
. 168
. 168
. 169
. 169
. 170
. 170
. 170
. 171
. 171
. 172
. 173
. 173
. 173
. 173
. 174
. 174
. 174
. 175
. 176
. 177
. 177
. 178
. 178
. 178
. 179
. 179
. 179
. 179
. 179
. 180
. 180
. 180
Contents
6.12
6.13
6.14
6.15
6.16
6.17
6.18
6.19
6.20
6.11.2.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values . . . . . . . . .
Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . . . . . . .
The Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.13.1 Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
More Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.1.1 Macro Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.1.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.1.3 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.1.4 Keyboard Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.2 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.4 User Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.17.5 Auto Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanner Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.19.1 Split Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.19.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens . . . . . .
6.19.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens . . . . . . .
6.19.1.3 Toggling Between Full &amp; Split Screens . . .
6.19.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card . . . .
6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.19.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character . . . . . .
6.19.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1 ANSI Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.1 Host Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.3 Xmit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.4 Kbd Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.5 Edit Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.6 Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.1.7 Host Char Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181
182
183
183
183
184
184
185
186
188
188
188
189
189
189
190
191
192
192
193
193
194
195
196
196
196
197
197
198
200
201
202
206
209
212
215
216
217
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
vii
Contents
6.20.1.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2 TESS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.1 Host Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.2 Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.3 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.5 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.6 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.7 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.2.9 Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.3 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.20.4 Radio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21 Ports– Tether And Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options. . . . . . .
6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings . . .
6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters . . . . .
6.21.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
6.21.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping . . . . . . . . .
6.22 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.22.2 802.IQ v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 218
. 218
. 219
. 220
. 222
. 224
. 225
. 229
. 230
. 232
. 233
. 240
. 240
. 241
. 241
. 242
. 245
. 245
. 250
. 250
. 250
. 251
External Bar Code Readers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners .
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPS Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8525/8530 Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 8525/8530 Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate . . . . .
7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Installing The Swivel Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 8530 Keyboard Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5.1 Keyboard L-Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5.2 Keyboard Mounting Cradle And Quick-Release
7.4.5.3 Keyboard RAM Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 255
. 255
. 255
. 255
. 256
. 256
. 257
. 258
. 261
. 262
. 262
. 263
. 264
. 266
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
viii Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Contents
7.4.6
7.4.7
7.4.8
7.4.9
Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8525/8530 Installation In High Voltage Vehicles
8525/8530 Installation In Vehicles. . . . . . . .
Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525/8530 . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
266
267
268
268
8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 802.11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) .
8.2.3 802.11a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) .
8.2.4 RA1001 - Narrow Band Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bar Code Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 External Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Scanner Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs . . . . . .
8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Lithium-Ion Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
273
275
275
275
275
276
276
276
276
277
277
279
280
Chapter 8: Specifications
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices
A.1 Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.2 Product Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.3 Worldwide Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
B.1
B.2
B.3
B.4
Tether Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 Port Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Keyboard–High Density DB-26 (8530 Only) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-3
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
C.1 USB Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1.1 Launching The Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
C.1.2 Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf . . . . C-2
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
ix
Contents
C.1.3
C.1.4
x
Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC . . . C-4
Post Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENTS
Microsoft's End User License Agreement
You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by Psion
Teklogix Inc. from Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (‘MS”). Those installed
software products of MS origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold.
All rights reserved.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE.
INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT PSION TEKLOGIX INC. FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY
USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS
EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following
license:
•
You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
•
NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. PSION TEKLOGIX INC. HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS
HAS RELIED UPON PSION TEKLOGIX INC. TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
•
NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, AND
EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU.
ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCE
WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST
INFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
I
License Agreement
REGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDING ON,
MS.
II
•
Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java. Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not
designed, manufactured, or intended for use or resale as online control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such
as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons
systems, in which the failure of Java technology could lead directly to
death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage. Sun
Microsystems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
•
No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL
APPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS
(U.S.$250.OO).
•
Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly.
You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE,
except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
•
SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS.
You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any transfer must also include all
prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
•
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE, including the
U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
License Agreement
Psion Teklogix Inc. End User License Agreement
IMPORTANT – READ CAREFULLY:
This License Agreement (“Agreement”) is a legal agreement between you and Psion
Teklogix (“we”), the licensor of Psion Teklogix software (“Software”), for your use of the
Software only as authorized in this Agreement.
By clicking on the “Accept” or other appropriate assent button and/or installing the
Software, you agree to be and are hereby bound by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. If you do not agree with this Agreement, we do not grant you a license to the
Software, and you may not install or use the Software or any accompanying documentation.
The Software is the property of Psion Teklogix Inc. or its licensors and is protected by
copyright laws and international copyright treaties, as well as other intellectual property laws
and treaties. The Software is licensed, not sold. Psion Teklogix Inc. provides the Software
and licenses its use worldwide. You assume responsibility for the selection of the Software
to achieve your intended results, and for the use and results obtained from it.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
We hereby grant you and you hereby accept a non-exclusive, non-transferable, limited
license to install and use the Software in object code form only with Psion Teklogix devices
only, subject to the terms and restrictions set forth in this Agreement. Except as explicitly set
forth below, (i) you are not permitted to copy, sell, lease or rent, distribute or sublicense the
Software or to use the Software in a time-sharing arrangement or in any other unauthorized
manner; (ii) no license is granted to you in the human readable code of the Software (source
code); and (iii) this Agreement does not grant you any rights to patents, copyrights, trade
secrets, trademarks, intellectual property or any other ownership rights with respect to the
Software.
2. DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS, RESTRICTIONS, RIGHTS AND
LIMITATIONS
a. Copy. The right and license granted to you shall be limited to installation and use of the
Software in the number of units of Psion Teklogix devices for which you have licensed the
Software. However, you may make a copy of the Software for backup or archival purposes.
You shall not remove any copyright notice or proprietary notices, labels or marks in or on the
Software.
b. No Modifications. You may not modify or create any derivative work of the Software or
any copy or portion thereof nor may you remove any Software identification, copyright or
other notices.
c. No Distribution. You may not distribute the Software, in whole or in part, to any other
third party.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
III
License Agreement
d. Virus Program. You may not develop or knowingly incorporate any virus program that
may be harmful to a computer or a network in conjunction with the Software, or use the
Software for any other purpose as which may be harmful to a third party.
e. Assignment. You may not assign or transfer the Software to a third party or allow a third
party to use the same.
f. Reverse Engineering. Modification, reverse engineering, reverse compiling, disassembly,
unbundling or extraction of the Software is expressly prohibited.
g. Export Restrictions. You agree to comply with all applicable laws and regulations and
that you will not export or re-export the Software, or any part or copies thereof, or any
products utilizing the Software in violation of applicable laws or regulations of the United
States or the country in which you obtained them.
3. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.
The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or
resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or
communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons
systems, in which the failure of the Software could lead to death, personal injury, or severe
physical or environmental damage (&quot;High Risk Activities&quot;). We specifically disclaim any
express or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities.
4. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
We do not warrant uninterrupted or error free operation of the Software nor do we warrant
that the Software will meet your requirements. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS-IS”
WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY WHATSOEVER AND WITHOUT ANY TECHNICAL
SUPPORT OF ANY KIND. WE DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL REPRESENTATIONS,
WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. WE DO NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS
REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE IN
TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, USE WITH FUTURE
PSION TEKLOGIX DEVICES INTRODUCED, OR OTHERWISE. YOU EXPRESSLY
ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE
RISK AND YOU ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE ON
YOUR COMPUTER.
IV
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
License Agreement
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
We are liable for no more than the value of the license fee that you paid for the Software.
This limitation is cumulative and our responsibility for multiple claims will not exceed in
aggregate this limit.
Under no circumstances are we or our third party suppliers liable for damages of third parties
claimed against you, or for harm to your records or data, or special, incidental, indirect, or
consequential damages, including but not limited to lost profits, lost business revenue or
failure to realize expected savings, loss of data, loss of use of the Software or any associated
equipment, downtime and user’s time, even if you informed us of their possibility, or for
breach of any express or implied warranty, breach of contract, negligence, strict liability or
any other legal theory related to the Software. This limitation applies whether you are
entitled to claim damages from us or our third party suppliers as a matter of contract or tort.
6. COPYRIGHTS, OWNERSHIP AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS
All title and copyrights in and to the Software, and any copies thereof, are owned by Psion
Teklogix Inc. or its suppliers. The Software also contains copyrighted material licensed from
our suppliers and all rights to such copyrighted material rests with such suppliers. We retain
title to the Software and any copies made from it. Any copies of the Software you made are
subject to the restrictions of this Agreement.
WE DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND INDEMNITIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, FOR PATENT OR COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT.
7. CONFIDENTIALITY
You agree not to use or disclose any proprietary information provided by us, except for the
purposes of this Agreement. You agree not to reproduce any of the copyrighted materials
unless expressly permitted by this Agreement.
8. ENDING THIS AGREEMENT
We may terminate this Agreement and your license immediately without notice if (a) you
fail to comply with any term of this Agreement, or (b) your rights are assigned by you, by
operation of law or otherwise. In such event, you must return or destroy all copies and
component parts of the Software and documentation, as well as any other Psion Teklogix
proprietary information in your possession, within fourteen (14) days of the date of
termination. Any rights and obligations under this Agreement that by their nature continue
after it ends will remain in effect until they are completed.
9. GENERAL
The laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal laws applicable therein, excluding the
conflict of laws provisions, govern this Agreement. If any provision of this Agreement is
deemed invalid or unenforceable by any country, that particular provision will be deemed
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
V
License Agreement
modified to the extent necessary to make the provision valid and enforceable, and the
remaining provisions will remain in full force and effect. Failure by us to insist on strict
performance or to exercise a right when entitled, does not prevent us from doing so at a later
time, either in relation to that default or any subsequent one.
No modifications of this Agreement shall be effective unless in writing and approved by us.
You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and that it is the
complete agreement between you and Psion Teklogix with respect to the subject matter
hereof and supersedes all prior agreements, oral or written.
VI
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
APPROVALS AND SAFETY SUMMARY
CE Marking
When used in a residential, commercial or light industrial environment the product
and its approved UK and European peripherals fulfil all requirements for CE marking.
R&amp;TTE Directive 1999/5/EC
This equipment complies with the essential requirements of EU Directive
1999/5/EC (Declaration available: www.psionteklogix.com).
Cet &eacute;quipement est conforme aux principales caract&eacute;ristiques d&eacute;finies dans la Directive europ&eacute;enne RTTE 1999/5/CE. (D&eacute;claration disponible sur le site:
www.psionteklogix.com).
Die Ger&auml;te erf&uuml;llen die grundlegenden Anforderungen der RTTE-Richtlinie
(1999/5/EG). (Den Wortlaut der Richtlinie finden Sie unter:
www.psionteklogix.com).
Questa apparecchiatura &egrave; conforme ai requisiti essenziali della Direttiva Europea
R&amp;TTE 1999/5/CE. (Dichiarazione disponibile sul sito: www.psionteklogix.com).
Este equipo cumple los requisitos principales de la Directiva 1995/5/CE de la UE,
“Equipos de Terminales de Radio y Telecomu-nicaciones”. (Declaraci&oacute;n disponible
en: www.psionteklogix.com).
Este equipamento cumpre os requisitos essenciais da Directiva 1999/5/CE do Parlamento Europeu e do Conselho (Directiva RTT). (Declara&ccedil;&atilde;o dispon&iacute;vel no
endere&ccedil;o: www.psionteklogix.com).
Ο εξοπλισ&micro;ός αυτός πληροί τις βασικές απαιτήσεις της κοινοτικής οδηγίας EU
R&amp;TTE 1999/5/EΚ. (Η δήλωση συ&micro;&micro;όρφωσης διατίθεται στη διεύθυνση:
www.psionteklogix.com)
Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de noodzakelijke vereisten van EU-richtlijn betreffende radioapparatuur en telecommunicatie-eindappa-ratuur 199/5/EG. (verklaring
beschikbaar: www.psionteklogix.com).
Dette udstyr opfylder de V&aelig;sentlige krav i EU's direktiv 1999/5/EC om Radio- og
teleterminaludstyr. (Erkl&aelig;ring findes p&aring;: www.psionteklogix.com).
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
VII
Approvals And Safety Summary
Dette utstyret er i overensstemmelse med hovedkravene i R&amp;TTE-direktivet
(1999/5/EC) fra EU. (Erkl&aelig;ring finnes p&aring;: www.psionteklogix.com).
Utrustningen uppfyller kraven f&ouml;r EU-direktivet 1999/5/EC om ansluten teleutrustning och &ouml;msesidigt erk&auml;nnande av utrustningens &ouml;verensst&auml;mmelse (R&amp;TTE).
(F&ouml;rklaringen finns att l&auml;sa p&aring;: www.psionteklogix.com).
T&auml;m&auml; laite vastaa EU:n radio- ja telep&auml;&auml;telaitedirektiivin (EU R&amp;TTE Directive
1999/5/EC) vaatimuksia. (Julkilausuma n&auml;ht&auml;vill&auml; osoitteessa:
www.psionteklogix.com).
i
L
Use of the 802.11b 8525/8530 vehicle-mount in France:
Owing to French Government restrictions, the 802.11b 8525/8530 vehiclemount is limited to indoor use. They may be used outdoors, on private property, only with prior authorization from the French Ministry of Defense.
FCC Information To Users
Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
VIII Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Approvals And Safety Summary
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
Some equipment in hospitals and aircraft are not shielded from radio frequency
energy. Do not use the 8525/8530 onboard aircraft, or in hospitals, without first
obtaining permission.
Do not use near pacemakers. The product may affect the operation of some medically implanted devices such as pacemakers, causing them to malfunction. Avoid
placing your product next to such devices. Keep a minimum distance of 20 cm
between the device and the product to reduce the risk of interference. If you have
any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn off the 8525/8530 and
contact your cardiologist for assistance.
Note: In August 1996 the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the US
adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency
energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters. The design of this product
complies with the FCC guidelines and those standards. To maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. Ensure the antenna is at least 20
cm from your body when transmitting.
Emissions Information For Canada
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian InterferenceCausing Equipment Regulations. To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
IX
Approvals And Safety Summary
provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed
outdoors is subject to licensing.
Cet appareil num&eacute;rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R&egrave;glement
sur le mat&eacute;riel brouilleur du Canada. Afin d'&eacute;viter toute interf&eacute;rence radio avec le
service autoris&eacute;, l'appareil doit &ecirc;tre utilis&eacute; &agrave; l'int&eacute;rieur, tout en tant &eacute;loign&eacute; de toute
fen&ecirc;tre afin de garantir le maximum de protection. Si cet &eacute;quipement (ou son
antenne &eacute;mettrice) est install&eacute; &agrave; l'ext&eacute;rieur, il est alors soumis &agrave; licence.
Warning to Users
Warning:Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Psion
Teklogix Inc. could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Important:
Note:
WASTE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)
DIRECTIVE 2002/96/EC
If your product or accessory displays the above logo, then the following
statement applies.
This Product, and its accessories, comply with the requirements of the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC. If your end-of-life
Psion Teklogix product or accessory was first placed on the European Union market
on or after August 13th, 2005, contact your local country representative for details
on how to arrange recycling.
For a list of international subsidiaries, please go to:
www.psionteklogix.com/public.aspx?s=us&amp;p=Contacts
RF EXPOSURE
Warning:
To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for vehicle mount transmitting devices, a separation distance of 20 centimetres should be
maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during
device operation. To ensure compliance, operations at closer than
this distance is not recommended.
DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES
To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be
removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment
without the covers and enclosures properly installed.
X
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Approvals And Safety Summary
CAUTION
Use of the Vehicle Mount Computer while charging the fork truck battery
is prohibited.
CAUTION
Use of additional wiring and attachments not recommended or sold by the
manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock or personal injury.
CAUTION
If using an AC adaptor, use only the AC adaptor recommended by
manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not operate the vehicle-mount computer with a damaged cord or plug.
Replace immediately.
CAUTION
Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over or
otherwise subjected to damage or stress.
CAUTION
An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of
an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock.
CAUTION
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the vehicle-mount computer from
the DC source before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
Warning:
Physically disconnect the 8525/8530 from the vehicle battery
during battery charging (into AC outlet).
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
XI
INTRODUCTION
1
1.1 About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Text Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.3 About The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.4 8525/8530 Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1.5 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5.1 8525 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.6 8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer And Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.6.1 8530 Regulatory Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
1
Chapter 1: Introduction
About This Manual
1.1 About This Manual
This manual describes how to configure, operate and maintain the Psion Teklogix
8525/8530 vehicle-mount computers.
Chapter 1: Introduction
provides a basic overview of the 8525 and 8530 vehicle-mounts.
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
describes the steps required to get the 8525/8530 ready for operation.
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
describes the 8525/8530 features and provides a description of the keyboard,
how to navigate in Microsoft&reg; Windows&reg; CE, and so on.
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
describes the Microsoft&reg; Windows&reg; CE desktop and how to use it. This
chapter also outlines the basics of moving around a Windows CE .NET
window, selecting and opening icons, files, folders and working with a
Windows dialog box.
Chapter 5: Configuration
provides a description of the Windows CE .NET Control Panel and how to use
it to configure the 8525/8530, along with the scanners attached to the unit, and
so on.
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
describes TESS and ANSI operations. This chapter also provides descriptions
of the Tekterm parameters.
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
describes the peripherals and accessories available for your 8525/8530.
Chapter 8: Specifications
details radio, vehicle-mount computer and battery specifications.
Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices
provides the helpdesk phone number at the Mississauga, Ontario, Canada office
and details the support services available. This appendix also lists the worldwide office addresses and phone numbers.
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
includes 8525/8530 pinouts.
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
describes the USB application.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
3
Chapter 1: Introduction
Text Conventions
1.2 Text Conventions
Note:
Notes highlight additional helpful information.
Important:
These statements provide particularly important instructions
or additional information that is critical to the operation of
the equipment.
Warning:
These statements provide critical information that may prevent
physical injury, equipment damage or data loss.
1.3 About The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer
The 8525 and 8530 are ruggedized vehicle-mount computers, running the
Microsoft&reg; Windows CE .NET operating system. They are intended for use in
commercial and industrial applications with a focus on real time wireless data
transactions. A wide range of data input capabilities are supported through a variety
of imager, RFID and bar code scanner options.
1.4 8525/8530 Features
4
•
Processor And Memory:
- 400MHz ARM RISC (400 MIPS).
- 32KB instruction/32KB data cache
- on-board RAM: 128 MBytes SDRAM
- on-board ROM: 64 MBytes FLASH.
•
Operating System
- Windows CE .NET 4.2
•
Wireless Communication:.
- NextGen Narrowband 400-500 MHz radio
- IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz Compact Flash radio external and
internal antenna
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
8525/8530 Features
-
-
IEEE 802.11b 11 Mbps 2.4 GHz external antenna PC Card Slot radio
standard antenna integrated onto radio card
Future radio additions:
- IEEE 802.11g 22Mbps 2.4GHz Compact Flash radio
- IEEE 802.11a 54Mbps 5 GHz Compact Flash radio
- IEEE 802.11a 54Mbps 5 GHz PC Card radio
GSM/GPRS PC Card radio (for future release)
Bluetooth SD I/O radio 2.4 GHz (5m range)
•
Application Software
- Internet Explorer 6 for CE
- Open Tekterm
- ANSI, TESS terminal emulations (IBM 3270, IBM 5250, HP 2392)
•
User Interface
Colour Display
8525: 1/2 VGA 640 x 240
- Transmissive TFT industrial for indoor/sunlight readability
- 8.8&quot;, 16 bit colour
- CCFL Backlight, 220 cd/m2 backlight with brightness control
8530: SVGA 800 x 600
- Transmissive TFT industrial for indoor/sunlight readability
- 10.4&quot;, 16 bit colour
- CCFL Backlight, 350 cd/m2 backlight with brightness control
Keyboards
- 3 keyboard formats available
- ABC
- Qwerty
- Azerty
- 68 key PC like format
- Green EL backlight
- Ergonomic
- Dedicated function keys
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
5
Chapter 1: Introduction
8525/8530 Features
-
Epoxy coated elastomeric
The 8530 includes a Soft Input Panel and also uses an external keyboard. The keypad layout is shared with the 8525.
Touchscreen
- Passive stylus or finger operation
- Rugged 5-wire technology
- Enhanced anti-glare coating
6
•
Indicators and Controls
- internal 95 dBA beeper with volume control
- 4 indicators: RX/TX, API, SCAN, PWR/CHG
•
Internal Expansion Slots
- one SD I/O (Multimedia Card) slot
- one Type II Compact Flash
- two Type II/one Type III PCMCIA slot(s)
- easy access to slots via sealed end cap
•
External Ports
- One Tether port with:
- one RS232 serial port (decoded scanner, printer)
- undecoded scanner port
- USB host port
- One port with:
- DB9 plug RS232
- One port with: High density socket
- one RS232 serial comm. port
- 1 USB device port
- 2 USB host ports
- Proprietary Keyboard port for 8530 only
•
Power Management
- Internal power supply 10-90VDC designed for forklift power
- Internal battery for brown-out protection
- 12.6V Li-Ion standard battery for brown-out
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer
-
Advanced Smart Battery
Built-in fast charger
1 week real-time clock backup
•
SNMP MIB 2 support
•
Remote software download
•
Remote WLAN management
1.5 8525 Vehicle-Mount Computer
Figure 1.1 8525 With Qwerty Keyboard
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
7
Chapter 1: Introduction
8525 Regulatory Labels
1.5.1 8525 Regulatory Labels
Warning:
Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Figure 1.2 FCC Label
Figure 1.3 RA2020 Label, EU
Figure 1.4 RA2020 &amp; SD-BT2 Label, FCC/IC/Australia/New Zealand
8
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
8525 Regulatory Labels
Figure 1.5 RA2020 &amp; SD-BT2 Label, EU
Figure 1.6 SD-BT2 Label, EU/FCC/IC/Australia/New Zealand
Figure 1.7 Manufacturer Label
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
9
Chapter 1: Introduction
8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer And Keyboard
1.6 8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer And Keyboard
Figure 1.8 8530 With Keyboard
10
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 1: Introduction
8530 Regulatory Labels
1.6.1 8530 Regulatory Labels
Warning:
Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Figure 1.9 FCC Label
03)/.4EKLOGIX)NC
4HISPRODUCTCONTAINS0SION4EKLOGIX-ODEL2!
4/3()&quot;!-ODEL3$&quot;4
H
Figure 1.10 RA2020 &amp; SD-BT2 Label, EU
03)/.4EKLOGIX)NC
4HISPRODUCTCONTAINS0SION4EKLOGIX-ODEL2!
H
Figure 1.11 RA2020 Label, EU
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
11
Chapter 1: Introduction
8530 Regulatory Labels
03)/.4EKLOGIX)NC
4HISPRODUCTCONTAINS4/3()&quot;!-ODEL3$&quot;4
&amp;##)$#*-3$&quot;)#(-3$&quot;
H
Figure 1.12 SD-BT2 Label, EU/FCC/IC/Australia/New Zealand
Figure 1.13 Manufacturer Label
Figure 1.14 WEEE Label
12
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
2
BASIC CHECKOUT
2.1 Preparing The 8525/8530 For Operation . . . . . .
2.2 8525/8530 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 8525/30 Freezer And Outdoor Guidelines . . . . .
2.3.1 Important Operating Instructions . . . . . . .
2.4 Switching On The Unit &amp; Configuring The Radio .
2.4.1 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio . . . . .
2.4.2 Assigning An IP Address . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3 Name Servers Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4 Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.4.1 Rearranging Preferred Networks . .
2.4.4.2 Deleting A Preferred Network. . . .
2.4.4.3 Changing Network Properties . . . .
2.5 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15
15
16
16
17
19
24
25
26
26
26
27
27
27
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
13
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Preparing The 8525/8530 For Operation
2.1 Preparing The 8525/8530 For Operation
Typically, 8525/8530 vehicle-mounts are configured at the factory and arrive ready
for use. Although the 8525/8530 is equipped with an internal Compact Flash slot, a
PCMCIA slot and SD I/O slot, these slots are not intended for user modification. If a
device needs to be changed or added in these slots, contact qualified Psion Teklogix
personnel. Refer to Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices for the
service number closest to you.
2.2 8525/8530 Safety Instructions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The cord should be installed in the vehicle so that it is not subjected to
damage or stress.
Use of an attachment to the power cord not recommended or sold by manufacturer may result in fire, electric shock, or personal injury.
An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of
an improper extension cord could result in fire or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure:
• The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and
shape as those on the adaptor.
• The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition
and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG.
When connected to the battery or AC adaptor, the mains power cord shall
comply with National safety regulations of the country where the equipment is to be used.
Do not operate the battery or AC adaptor with a damaged cord or plug.
Replace it immediately.
Do not operate the AC adaptor if it has received a sharp blow, been
dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by
qualified service personnel.
Do not disassemble the AC adaptor; it should be repaired by qualified
service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or fire.
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the battery or AC adaptor from the
outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning.
Do not expose the battery or AC adaptor to rain or snow.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
15
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
8525/30 Freezer And Outdoor Guidelines
2.3 8525/30 Freezer And Outdoor Guidelines
8525/8530 vehicle-mounts are sealed against dust and high-pressure water jets to
the international standard IP66.
2.3.1 Important Operating Instructions
Warning:
IT IS CRITICAL that this information be reviewed and that any
guidelines applicable to your vehicle-mount be strictly followed.
For All Freezer Vehicle-Mounts
•
•
•
•
•
Use vehicle-mounts only in the environments for which they are designed.
All Psion Teklogix freezer vehicle-mounts have built-in heaters where
required to warm internal components. To help maintain the temperature,
units should be switched on before entry into a freezer environment and
should be left connected to vehicle power and running at all times while in a
freezer environment.
When moving between freezer and warm, humid environments, window
condensation or icing on the outside of the display window is a normal
occurrence. Wiping the condensation from the window may help, but the
operator may need to wait until the condensation stops forming before use.
To reduce condensation and frost on vehicle-mount displays, use an
anti-fogging agent once a week or as required.
Contact lubricant and connector caps must be used on all external connectors to maintain a moisture barrier and prevent corrosion during freezer and
outdoor use. On all 8525/8530 vehicle-mount computers, the contact lubricant –PN 95146 (Nyogel) must be used. Further, the appropriate contact
lubricant should be replaced at least monthly in applications requiring daily
or frequent removal of cables. Refer to the table below for connector cap
part numbers.
Vehicle-Mount Type
Connector Cap
Part Number
8525/8530 Freezer
26-pin DSUB Female
9008295
8525/8530 Freezer
9-pin DSUB
9008296
8530 Freezer
26-pin DSUB Male
9008294
Table 2.1 Connector Caps
16
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Switching On The Unit &amp; Configuring The Radio
Backup Battery
The vehicle-mount back up battery capacity is reduced as the operating temperature
cools. The table below provides a general outline of battery capacity based on the
operating temperature. Charging of the back up battery will occur between +5&deg; C
and +45&deg; C.
Temperature
Backup Battery
Capacity
-30&deg; C (-22&deg; F)
35%
-20&deg; C (-4&deg; F)
45%
-10&deg; C (14&deg; F)
60%
0&deg; C (32&deg; F)
close to 80%
Table 2.2 Backup Battery Performance
Warning:
•
•
•
Do not install the 8525/8530 in such a way that the power cable is
bent 90 degrees as this may damage the power cable and power
cable strain relief.
To prevent condensation when a vehicle-mount is moved from a freezer to a
warmer environment, it is recommended that the computer power be left on
for at least five minutes.
When not in use, vehicle-mount freezer units should be stored in temperatures above 0&deg; C (32&deg; F).
To prevent keyboard keys from freezing up, the keyboard should be
mounted off the horizontal plane. This allows water to run off the keyboard
and prevents it from pooling on the keypad, freezing and finally physically
jamming the keys. Mounting the keyboard off the horizontal plane also prevents water from dripping onto the keypad area.
2.4 Switching On The Unit &amp; Configuring The Radio
Switching The 8525 On And Off
•
Note:
Press the [ENTER/ON] key.
If the 8525/8530 is in suspend state, pressing [ENTER/ON] key ‘wakes’
the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working before the
computer entered suspend state is displayed.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
17
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Switching On The Unit &amp; Configuring The Radio
To switch off the 8525:
•
Press the [BLUE] key, and then press the [ENTER/ON] key.
Turning off the 8525/8530 does not result in a complete reboot; rather, the unit
enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the 8525/8530 is turned on from
suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
Important:
If the word ‘BLUE’ is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar
at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked ‘on’ – the 8525/8530
will not switch off. Press the [BLUE] key again
to unlock it; then press [BLUE] [ENTER/ON] to switch the
8525 off.
If, however, you’ve disabled the “Blue Key” in the ‘One Shot’
dialog box (see “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 81), the
8525 can be turned off even when the [BLUE] key is locked ‘on’.
Switching The 8530 On And Off
•
Press the [ON/OFF] switch on right side of the 8530 to turn the unit on
and off,
or
Press the [ENTER/ON] key on the keyboard to turn on the 8530, and press
[BLUE] [ENTER/ON] to turn off the unit.
Note:
18
Pressing the 8530 ON/OFF switch or using the [BLUE][ENTER/ON] key
combination does not result in a complete reboot. The unit enters ‘suspend’ state until it is switched on.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
2.4.1 Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
The most common 802.11b settings are configured as defaults. However, there are
some fields that must be completed, including the SSID of your access point and the
security methods implemented in the network (including access keys).
Important:
If the 8525/8530 is equipped with a radio that has never been configured, the radio settings dialog box opens automatically when
the unit is powered on. In this case, skip to Step 4 on page 20.
To configure the 802.11b radio:
1. Tap on the Start button in the taskbar, and tap on Settings&gt;Network
and Dial-up Connections.
Figure 2.1 Network And Dial-Up Connections
Note:
You can press [CTRL] [ESC] to display the Start Menu.
2. Choose the radio icon to open the Wireless LAN Settings window – in
the sample screen below, this is labelled PTXWLAG.
Figure 2.2 Wireless Settings Window
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
19
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
3. Wireless Statistics Tab
When you choose the Wireless LAN icon, a Wireless Statistics
window is displayed.
Figure 2.3 Wireless Statistics
This tab lists your radio statistics. Choosing the Zero button resets the
statistics of the last four items – Packets IN, Packets OUT, IN errors and
OUT errors.
• Tap the stylus on the Wireless Information tab.
4. Wireless Information Tab
Figure 2.4 Wireless Information Tab
This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect, and it allows
you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network.
Note:
20
Connect button – To force connection to a specific, existing network,
highlight the network to which you want your 8525/8530 to connect, and
tap the Connect button.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
This tab lists available networks – any access points that are broadcasting
an SSID, and it lists preferred networks – networks that you have configured. Since access points are generally secure, they will most likely not
be listed here. By default, the 8525/8530 attempts to connect to preferred
networks. This behaviour can be changed by enabling ‘Automatically
connect to non-preferred networks’ in the Advanced dialog box (page 26).
• To add a new configuration, double-tap on the Add New item listed with
the networks. A blank Wireless Properties dialog box is displayed.
5. Wireless Properties
Figure 2.5 Wireless Properties Dialog Box
Network name (SSID):
• Type the appropriate SSID (Service Set Identifier) in the ‘Network
name (SSID):’ text entry field at the top of this dialog box.
The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters. The
name assigned here is listed as a preferred network.
Important: Keep in mind that the 8525/8530 will only communicate with
access points that are configured with the same SSID.
Ad Hoc And Infrastructure
If you are using an “Infrastructure” network – one in which 8525/8530s
must pass data through an access point – leave the checkbox next to ‘This is
an ad hoc network’ empty.
If you are using an “Ad Hoc” network – a network in which 8525/8530s
pass data directly to other 8525/8530s without an access point – tap on the
checkbox next to ‘This is an ad hoc network’ to enable Ad Hoc.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
21
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
Encryption
WEP (Wired-Equivalent Privacy) encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network. If you are not using encryption, you can
choose ‘Disabled’ from the dropdown encryption menu. Otherwise, leave
this field as is.
Authentication
802.11 supports a number of subtypes of network authentication services:
Open, Shared, WPA and WPA-PSK.
Using Open authentication, any wireless station can request authentication.
The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an
authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending
station. The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether
it recognizes the identity of the sending station.
Using Shared authentication, each wireless station is assumed to have
received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from
the 802.11 wireless network communications channel.
WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) uses the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
(TKIP) to provide strong data encryption, and offers two user authentication and key management methods.
The first method of user authentication is intended for environments using a
centralized Authentication Server, such as RADIUS. User authentication is
based on IEEE 802.1X and mutual authentication based EAP.
In environments where a centralized Authentication Server or EAP framework is not available, user authentication is based on a ‘Pre-Shared Key’
method – WPA-PSK. If you are using Pre-Shared Key authentication, you
will need to manually enter a password (Master Key) in the Access Point or
Wireless Router and enter the same password in each client device that
accesses the wireless network. The manually configured WPA password
(Master Key) automatically starts the TKIP data encryption process.
22
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Configuring An IEEE 802.11 Radio
Network Key:
This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an
equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active
WEP key on the access point.
•
To assign a Network key, tap in the checkbox next to ‘The key is provided automatically’ to remove the check mark next to this option.
Disable this option to
access Network Key &amp;
Key Index fields.
Figure 2.6 Accessing Network Key And Key Index
Key Index:
This field is used to identify the WEP key.
• Enter a value from 1 to 4.
Enable 802.1x authentication
“802.1X” is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area
networks. It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet
network, whether wired or wireless. A security protocol packet such as TLS
or MD5 encapsulated in an “EAP” is used in conjunction with the “802.1x”
standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer. Available EAPs are listed
in the dropdown menu next to the ‘EAP’ option.
•
To activate “802.1X”, tap on the checkbox next to ‘Enable 802.1x
authentication’, and press the [SPACE] key to enable it.
EAP Type (Extensible Authentication Protocol):
This dropdown menu lists the EAP types available on your system. The
items in this dropdown menu will vary depending on your network setup.
Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
23
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Assigning An IP Address
a ‘Certificate’. By selecting the Properties button, you will be able to
select a Certificate. “Certificate Assignment” on page 93 provides a website
that outlines how to create certificates for your network.
6. Saving and exiting the radio setup.
Once you have completed your configuration, press [ENTER] or tap
on OK.
The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a
preferred network. The radio will search for the SSID and will compare the WEP
and authentication information you specified. If there is a match between your
8525/8530 settings and the access point settings, the 8525/8530 will communicate
on the network through the access point.
2.4.2 Assigning An IP Address
If your network is not using a DHCP server, you will need to assign an IP address.
Figure 2.7 Configuring An IP Address
Note:
24
Choosing the Renew button forces the 8525/8530 to renew or find a new
IP address. This is useful if, for example, you are out of communication
range for a longer period of time and your 8525/8530 is dropped from
the network.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Name Servers Tab
To define a static IP address:
• Tap the Configure button.
Figure 2.8 Defining An IP Address
•
•
Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address.
Tap on each field, and type an IP, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway
address. Tap on OK to save your information.
2.4.3 Name Servers Tab
Note:
•
•
If DHCP is enabled, name server addresses are assigned automatically.
In the IP Information tab, tap on the Configure button. (“Figure 2.8” on
page 25 is the window from which you choose the Configure button.)
Tap on the Name Servers tab.
Figure 2.9 Name Servers Tab
The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional
WINS and DNS resolvers. The format for these fields is ###.###.###.###.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
25
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Advanced Features
2.4.4 Advanced Features
To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box:
•
Tap the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab.
This window lists the available preferred networks.
Figure 2.10 Advanced Settings
2.4.4.1
Rearranging Preferred Networks
The 8525/8530 attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dialog box in
sequence, beginning at the top of the list. If you need to rearrange this list of
networks – move networks up and down in the list:
•
•
2.4.4.2
In the networks list, tap on the network that you want to move up or down in
the list.
To move the highlighted item upward or downward in the list, tap the Up or
Down button, and press [ENTER].
Deleting A Preferred Network
To delete a network from this list:
• Tap on the network in the list to highlight it.
• Tap the Delete button, and press [ENTER].
26
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 2: Basic Checkout
Changing Network Properties
2.4.4.3
Changing Network Properties
To change the properties of an existing preferred network:
• Highlight the network that you want to modify.
• Tap the Properties button, and press [ENTER].
• Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box, and
press [ENTER] to save the changes.
Note:
You do not need to reset your 8525/8530 after configuring the radio.
2.5 Calibrating The Touchscreen
Before using your 8525/8530, you will need to calibrate the touchscreen. Refer to
“Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 38 for details.
2.6 Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount
Important:
Because Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee what has been saved
(registry) after a reset, this should be considered as a last resort.
To reset the 8525/8530:
•
Press and hold down the [BLUE] key and the [ENTER/ON] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.
While it is most likely that the contents of the flash memory and memory card will
be preserved, Psion Teklogix cannot guarantee this.
Note:
On the 8530, pressing and holding down the ‘on/off’ switch on the right
side of the unit down for 10 or more seconds resets the vehicle-mount.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
27
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR 8525/8530
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Features Of The 8525/8530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Internal Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching The 8525/8530 On And Off . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.1 Activating Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1.2 Locking Modifier Keys . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 The Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 8525/8530 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.1 PWR/CHG – Charge LED. . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.2 RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.3 Scan LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1.4 API – User Application LED . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.3 Audio Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.1 Scanning Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.3 Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners . . .
3.8 Connecting &amp; Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals. . . . . .
3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Connecting An 8525/8530 To A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Using Microsoft&reg; ActiveSync&reg; To Work With Files
3.11 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525/8530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
37
37
38
38
39
40
40
40
40
41
44
44
44
45
45
46
46
47
48
48
49
49
49
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
29
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Features Of The 8525/8530
3.1 Features Of The 8525/8530
The 8525 and 8530 vehicle-mounts share the same radio dome with identical features.
Inside The Radio Dome
- SDIO/MMC Slot – for Bluetooth radio or additional storage memory
- PCMCIA slot - supports 2-Type II PCMCIA or 1-Type III PCMCIA card
- Compact Flash slot - for 802.11b radios or additional storage memory
Radio Dome
Figure 3.1 Front Of 8525
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
31
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Features Of The 8525/8530
Tether Port
Auxiliary Port
RS232 Serial Port
Figure 3.2 8525 Ports
Keyboard Port
RS232 Serial Port
Auxiliary Port
Tether Port
Figure 3.3 8530 Ports
32
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
The Internal Backup Battery
Keyboard Port
Figure 3.4 8530 Keyboard Port
3.2 The Internal Backup Battery
The 8525/8530 vehicle-mount is equipped with an internal battery that will provide
backup power to the unit for up to fifteen minutes of normal operation. After 15
minutes, the unit will shut off to preserve the contents of RAM.
The backup battery is not user accessible. It must be replaced by authorized Psion
Teklogix personnel.
3.3 Switching The 8525/8530 On And Off
Switching The 8525 On And Off
•
Note:
Press the [ENTER/ON] key.
If the 8525/8530 is in suspend state, pressing [ENTER/ON] key ‘wakes’
the unit from this state. The screen in which you were working before the
computer entered suspend state is displayed.
To switch off the 8525:
•
Press the [BLUE] key, and then press the [ENTER/ON] key.
Keep in mind that turning off the 8525/8530 does not result in a complete reboot;
rather, the unit enters a power-saving, “suspend” state. When the 8525/8530 is
turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds.
Important:
If the word ‘BLUE’ is displayed in uppercase in the taskbar
area at the bottom of the screen, this key is locked “on” – the
8525/8530 will not switch off. Press the [BLUE] key again
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
33
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
The Keyboard
to unlock it; then press [BLUE] [ENTER/ON] to switch the
8525 off.
If, however, you’ve disabled the “Blue Key” in the ‘One Shot’
dialog box (see “Keyboard One Shot Modes” on page 81), the
8525 can be turned off even when the [BLUE] key is locked ‘on’.
Switching The 8530 On And Off
•
Press the ‘ON/OFF’ switch on the side of the 8530 to turn the unit
on and off, or
•
Press [ENTER/ON] to turn the 8530 on, and press [BLUE] [ENTER/ON]
to turn the unit off.
Note:
Pressing the ON/OFF to switch the 8530 off does not result in a
complete reboot.
3.4 The Keyboard
The 8525/8530 offers three keyboard layouts – Qwerty, ABC and Azerty. The 8530
is equipped with an external keyboard offering the same layouts as the 8525
vehicle-mount.
Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer. If a key
or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted.
Note:
The 8525/8530 provides the framework to design your own SIP. On the
8530, a soft keyboard that is an exact replica of the external keyboard is
available. Refer to “Input Panel” on page 124 for details.
3.4.1 Modifier Keys
The [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [BLUE] ad [ORANGE] keys are modifier keys.
Pressing a modifier key changes the function of the next key pressed. For example, a
square bracket is printed in orange print above the [4] key. Pressing the [ORANGE]
key followed by the [4] key displays a square bracket rather than the number 4.
The [SHIFT], [CTRL] and [ALT] keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except
that they are not chorded (two keys held down simultaneously). The modifier key
must be pressed first followed by the key whose function you want modified.
34
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Activating Modifier Keys
3.4.1.1
Activating Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed once, it is displayed in lowercase letters in the
taskbar at the bottom of the 8525/8530 screen. For example, if the [CTRL] key is
pressed, ctrl key is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen. Once another key is
pressed, the modifier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar.
3.4.1.2
Locking Modifier Keys
When a modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked’ on. A ‘locked’ modifier key is
displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar. For example, pressing the [BLUE] key
twice locks it on – it is displayed as BLUE KEY in the taskbar at the bottom of the
computer screen.
The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock
or turn it off. Once a modifier key is unlocked (pressed a third time), the uppercase
representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed.
Note:
The locking function of the [ORANGE] and [BLUE] keys can be disabled
so that pressing either of these keys once will lock the keys ‘on’.
If you disable the ‘One Shot’ function of either of these keys, pressing the
[BLUE] and/or [ORANGE] key once will lock the key ‘on’. Pressing the
same key a second time will unlock or turn it ‘off’. Refer to “Keyboard
One Shot Modes” on page 81 for details.
3.4.2 The Keys
The [BLUE] And [ORANGE] Keys
The [BLUE] and [ORANGE] modifier keys provide access to additional symbols
and keys. These additional symbols and keys are colour coded in blue and orange
print above the keyboard keys.
Press the [BLUE] key to access functions or characters displayed in blue print on the
keyboard. Press the [ORANGE] key to access functions or characters displayed in
orange print on the keyboard.
The [SHIFT/CAPS] Key
The [SHIFT/CAPS] key is used to display uppercase alpha characters. Pressing
[BLUE][SHIFT] turns the [CAPS] key on so that all alpha characters are printed in
uppercase until the [BLUE][SHIFT] sequence is pressed again.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
35
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
The Keys
The Arrow Keys
The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow –
up, down, left and right. The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that
indicates where the next character you type will appear.
The [INS] Key
The [INS] key inserts a character at the cursor position.
The [DEL] Key
The [DEL] key erases the character at the cursor position.
The [BKSP] Key
The [BKSP] key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor
one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke.
The [CTRL] And [ALT] Key
The [CTRL] and [ALT] keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are
application dependent.
The [TAB] Key
Typically, the [TAB] key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or
downward.
The [ESC] Key
Generally, this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu, dialog
box or activity and return to the previous one.
The [SPACE] Key
Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. In a Windows dialog
box, pressing the [SPACE] key enables or disables a checkbox.
The [HOME] Key
The [HOME] key moves the cursor to the top of the form or page.
36
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
The Keypad Backlight
The [END] Key
The [END] key moves the cursor to the bottom of the form or page.
The [PgUp] And [PgDn] Keys
The [PgUp] key displays the previous screen of information. The [PgDn] key
displays the next screen of information.
Function Keys And Macro Keys
In addition to alphanumeric keys that are directly accessible on the keyboard (no
key combination is required) and the keys described in this chapter, the 8525/8530
keyboard is also equipped with thirty function keys and twelve macro keys.
Function keys [F1] through [F30] and Macro keys [M1] to [M12] can be used with
the CE operating system or another application. All function keys and macro keys
can be custom defined for each application. The Tekterm application utilizes these
keys. Refer to “Additional Keyboard Functions” on page 157 for details.
3.4.3 The Keypad Backlight
The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight
is activated can be configured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows CE .NET
Control Panel. The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard
Properties dialog box.
Note:
Refer to “Keyboard Backlight” on page 80 for details about this option.
Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
3.5 The Display
8525/8530s are equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in
low light conditions. The backlight switches on when a key is pressed or the
touchscreen is tapped. The backlight intensity and the duration of time that the
backlight will remain at full intensity can be specified in the Display Properties
dialog box in the Windows CE .NET Control Panel.
Note:
Refer to “Display Backlight” on page 78 for details about the Display
Properties dialog box.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
37
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Calibrating The Touchscreen
3.5.1 Calibrating The Touchscreen
If your 8525/8530 touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the
stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item, use the Stylus Properties
dialog box in the Windows CE .NET Control Panel to recalibrate the screen.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window.
Figure 3.5 Stylus Icon
•
Choose the Calibration tab, and then tap on the Recalibrate button.
Figure 3.6 Calibration Screen
•
Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen.
3.6 8525/8530 Indicators
8525/8530s use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and audio tones
as indicators.
38
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
LEDs
3.6.1 LEDs
The 8525/8530 is equipped with four tri-coloured LEDs located in the upper-right
corner of the keyboard. If you have an 8530 and are using the onscreen, soft
keyboard, only the API and Rx/Tx LEDs are available in the taskbar.
This section outlines what these LEDs indicate.
Important:
You should proceed cautiously if a LED is illuminated in red; this
generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or an active
laser emission.
LEDs
Figure 3.7 Keyboard LEDs
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
39
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
PWR/CHG – Charge LED
3.6.1.1
PWR/CHG – Charge LED
The lower-right LED is reserved for internal charger/power status. This LED
operates as follows:
LED Behaviour
Description
Solid green
Slow flashing green
External power in use. Backup battery is present.
External power in use. Backup battery not present.
External power not in use. Unit drawing power
from backup battery.
Blinking yellow
3.6.1.2
RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED
The upper-left LED on your 8525/8530 flashes either yellow or green to indicate
when the radio transmits and receives data.
Note:
Keep in mind that while the standard 802.11b radio supports the transmit/receive LED, not all radios support this function.
Function
Radio Traffic LED Behaviour
Radio Transmit
Radio Receive
LED flashes yellow.
LED flashes green.
Table 3.1 Transmit and Receive LEDs
3.6.1.3
Scan LED
Successful scans are indicated in two ways – with a scan LED and with an audio tone.
Function
Scan in progress
Successful scan
Unsuccessful scan
Scan LED Behaviour
LED displays solid red during scan.
LED displays solid green after decode.
Off when scan ended.
LED flashes red.
Table 3.2 Scan LED
3.6.1.4
API – User Application LED
This indicator is available for user-loaded custom Windows CE .NET
applications. Refer to the 8525/8530 SDK Manual for details about this LED.
Neither Windows CE .NET nor Tekterm use this LED.
40
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Onscreen Indicators
3.6.2 Onscreen Indicators
The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators.
Figure 3.8 Taskbar
This display changes dynamically, and only those icons that are applicable are
displayed. For example, if a radio is not installed in your 8525/8530, the radio signal
icon is not displayed in the taskbar.
Windows Start Button
You can display the Start Menu by tapping on the Start button in the taskbar.
Modifier Key Indicators
[SHIFT], [CTRL], [ALT], [BLUE] and [ORANGE] are modifier keys that have
onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked. If a modifier key is
pressed once to activate it, the key is displayed in the taskbar in lowercase characters
– for example, pressing the [BLUE] key once displays blue key in the taskbar. If a
modifier key is pressed twice, it is ‘locked on’ and the onscreen indicator is
displayed in uppercase letters in the taskbar – for example, pressing [BLUE] twice
displays BLUE KEY in the taskbar.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
41
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Onscreen Indicators
802.11 Radio Signal Quality
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.
Good
Reception
Weak
Reception
No Radio
Link
Narrow Band Radio Signal Quality
Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer, filled bars within this icon.
Good
Reception
Weak
Reception
No Radio
Link
The radio signal is determined when the 8525/8530 receives a message. If the unit
receives no messages within a second, the “no signal” icon is displayed. The signal
strength icon shows the following cases: No signal, 1% to 25% bar, 26% to 50% bar,
51% to 75% bar and 75% to 100% bar.
Link Status
The Narrow Band radio displays one of three link state icons. An uppercase ‘LINK’
with a green background indicates the radio is powered on and that the unit is online
and locked onto a channel. A lowercase ‘Link’ with a yellow background indicates
that the radio is powered on but the 8525/8530 is not online or not locked onto a
channel. A lowercase ‘Link’ with a yellow background and a red ‘X’ through it
indicates that the radio is not powered on, is not online and is not locked onto a
channel.
Bluetooth Radio
If a Bluetooth radio is installed in your 8525/8530, this icon is displayed in the taskbar.
42
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Onscreen Indicators
Security Level
Security levels can be set to limit user access to 8525/8530 settings. In addition,
applications can be restricted to prevent inadvertent changes.
Battery Icons
Battery In Use
This icon indicates that the 8525/8530 is drawing power from the backup battery
rather than external DC power.
Battery Very Low
When the 8525/8530 is running on the backup battery (rather than external power)
and the battery power is nearly depleted, this icon is displayed in the taskbar.
Battery Charging
This battery icon indicates that the vehicle-mount is running on external DC power,
and that the backup battery is present.
External DC Power
This external DC power icon is displayed in the taskbar when the unit is using
external DC power and the backup battery is not present.
Onscreen LEDs (8530 Only)
When the 8530 keyboard is removed, two onscreen-LEDs are displayed in the
taskbar. The LED to the left acts as the API indicator, and the LED to the right acts
as the TX/RX (transmit and receive) indicator.
These onscreen LEDs behave in the same way as those on the keyboard, changing
colour to indicate different operations. For details about LED behaviour, refer to
“RX/TX – Radio Traffic LED” and “API – User Application LED” on page 40.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
43
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Audio Indicators
3.6.3 Audio Indicators
The 8525/8530 beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a
sound when a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, scan input is accepted
or rejected or an operator’s entry does not match in a match field.
Note:
Refer to “Volume And Sound Properties” on page 88 for details about
the Volume &amp; Sound Properties dialog box.
3.7 Scanning
The scanner used with your unit is configured using the Scanner Properties dialog
box in the Control Panel.
Note:
Refer to “Scanner Properties Setup” on page 128 for details.
The 8525/8530 supports a variety of one dimensional (1D) laser scanners.
“Scanning Techniques” outlines the mechanics of a successful scan. In addition,
review “Scan LED Indicators” on page 45 to better understand how to interpret
whether or not a bar code has been successfully scanned. Finally, “Troubleshooting”
on page 45 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail.
3.7.1 Scanning Techniques
Note:
•
•
•
•
•
44
External scanners can be connected to the 8525/8530 tether. serial or
USB device port.
Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code.
Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can
reflect back into the scanner’s exit window and prevent a successful decode.
Scan the entire bar code. Make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar
and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the
symbol.
Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes.
Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Scan LED Indicators
3.7.2 Scan LED Indicators
The 8525/8530 scanner LED (the upper-right LED) indicates whether or not your
scan is successful. Keep in mind that scan indicators only function when using a
non-decoded 1D laser scanner connected to the tether port. All other external
scanners have integrated LED indicators that are not controlled by the 8525/8530.
The LED behaves as follows:
•
•
•
Scan In Progress: scan LED displays solid red colour.
Successful Scan: scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when
the scan is ended.
Unsuccessful scan: scan LED flashes red.
A bar code icon appears on the screen during a scan. While the scanner beam is
active, the onscreen message states – SCANNING. If the scan is successful, the bar
code data is displayed on the screen until the scan trigger is released.
3.7.3 Troubleshooting
If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Is the 8525/8530 on?
Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the
8525/8530 you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code.
Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different
bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code.
Check that the bar code is within the proper range.
Does the vehicle-mount display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the 8525/8530.
Is the laser beam scanning across the bar code?
Once the scan beam has stopped, check the scanner window for
dirt or fogging.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
45
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners
3.7.4 Operating One Dimensional (1D) Laser Scanners
•
Turn the 8525/8530 on. Wait until the unit has booted up completely.
Important:
•
If an aiming dot is available on the scanner, the dot will be
enabled for a configurable time period (including off), after
which normal scanning begins. Refer to “Dot Time (msec)” on
page 130 for details.
Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and
initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard
on long-range and high visibility internal scanners.
Aim at the bar code and press the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have
elapsed.
3.8 Connecting &amp; Disconnecting Tethered Peripherals
Tethered peripherals such as imagers, RFID readers, scanners and/or printers
connect to the vehicle-mount computer with a quick release, circular connector. For
most peripherals, when they are connected to the vehicle-mount, the 8525/8530
detects them and loads the necessary drivers. Keep in mind however that some
peripherals may require their own specific drivers to be loaded manually. An icon in
the taskbar at the bottom of the screen provides a visual representation of the
peripheral and indicates that it is ready for operation.
46
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Monitoring The Network Connection
To attach the peripheral to the round, tether port on the side of the 8525/8530:
•
Insert the barrel of the plug into the tether port and rotate slowly until it
clicks into place. The red dot on the port and on the connector should
be aligned.
Tether Port
Figure 3.9 The Tether Port
To remove the peripheral:
• Grasp the shell of the plug, and pull it back gently to unlock and release
the connector.
Important:
Never attempt to disconnect a peripheral by pulling the connector
by the wire. The connector is locked into place and can only be
unlocked and removed by pulling back the plug shell.
3.9 Monitoring The Network Connection
If your vehicle-mount is equipped with a wireless LAN radio, it will typically
associate with the nearest access point. The radio signal quality meter in the taskbar
indicates the relative strength of the communication link.
To access the radio signal icon from the keyboard:
• Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the Wireless Statistics
dialog box.
Note:
Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on
a network session. At times, you may need to renew your connection by
logging in again.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
47
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
Connecting An 8525/8530 To A PC
3.10 Connecting An 8525/8530 To A PC
To pass information between an 8525/8530 and a PC or laptop, you’ll need to
connect them using an Auxiliary Port Cable (Model CA2200). This cable is
equipped with two USB Host I/F connections (for devices such as a mouse or
keyboard) and one USB Device I/F connection (to, for example, connect a PC or
laptop computer to the 8525/8530).
Auxiliary
Connector
USB
Connector
Figure 3.10 Auxiliary Port Cable
•
•
Attach the auxiliary connector to the auxiliary port on the 8525/8530 – the
port closest to the vehicle-mount power cable.
Attach the USB connector to your PC or laptop.
3.10.1 Using Microsoft&reg; ActiveSync&reg; To Work With Files
Before communication can begin between an 8525/8530 and a PC, ActiveSync&reg; –
Microsoft PC connectivity software – must be installed on your PC. Once the
devices are cabled together, running ActiveSync on the PC will allow you to:
•
•
•
48
View 8525/8530 files from Windows Explorer.
Drag and drop files between the 8525/8530 and the PC in the same way that
you would between PC drives.
Back up 8525/8530 files to the PC, then restore them from the PC to the
vehicle-mount again, if needed, and so on.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 3: Getting To Know Your 8525/8530
General Maintenance
To install ActiveSync, follow the step-by-step instructions provided with the
program’s setup wizard. Refer to the following website for details:
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/resources/downloads/pocketpc/activesync35.mspx
Note:
You’ll need you need to run usbsetup.exe to configure Windows to recognize the 8525/8530. For information about this USB application, refer to
Appendix C: USB Setup Application.
3.11 General Maintenance
3.11.1 Caring For The Touchscreen
The top of the touchscreen is a thin, flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive
coating on the inside. The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals
and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches. Using sharp objects on the touchscreen
can scratch or cut the plastic, or crack the internal conductive coating.
If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments, consider applying a disposable
screen protector (PN 1008009). These covers reduce the clarity of the display
slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touchscreen. When they
become scratched and abraded, they are easily removed and replaced.
The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen:
•
•
•
•
•
mustard, ketchup,
sodium hydroxide,
concentrated caustic solutions,
benzyl alcohol, and
concentrated acids.
3.11.2 Cleaning The 8525/8530
Important:
•
•
•
Do not immerse the unit in water. Dampen a soft cloth with mild
detergent to wipe the unit clean.
Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the vehicle-mount unit.
Avoid abrasive cleaners, solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning.
To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen, use isopropyl alcohol.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
49
4
WORKING WITH WINDOWS CE .NET
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications .
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus .
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard . . . . . . . .
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs . . . . .
4.3 The Startup Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2.1 Using The Taskbar . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2.2 Customizing The Taskbar . . . . . . .
4.4 The Start Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.1 The Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.2 Security Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.3 Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.4 Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.5 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.6 Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4.7 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.5 Using A Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
53
53
54
55
55
56
57
57
57
58
59
59
62
63
64
65
65
66
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
51
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications
4.1 Navigating In Windows CE .NET And Applications
Graphic user interfaces like Windows CE .NET for portable devices and desktop
Windows (2000, XP, etc.) utilize ‘point and click’ navigation. An equivalent
keyboard shortcut is also available for every ‘point and click’ action.
Windows CE .NET supports the same ‘point and click’ user interface and keyboard
shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference – the ‘point and click’ action is
accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse. Actions can be performed
using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping.
Note:
Keep in mind that while the 8530 is always equipped with a touchscreen,
the 8525 can be ordered with or without a touchscreen.
4.1.1 Navigating Using A Touchscreen And Stylus
Note:
If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately, it may
need recalibration. Refer to “Calibrating The Touchscreen” on page 38.
An 8525/8530 equipped with a touchscreen has a stylus – a pointing tool that looks
like a pen – that is used to select objects on the touchscreen.
Note:
To prevent damage to the touchscreen, use only the stylus (pen) supplied
with your 8525/8530.
To open a file, launch an applet or open a folder:
•
Double-tap the stylus on the appropriate icon.
To navigate through a dialog box – for example, display the information in a tab,
choose a radio button, check a checkbox and so on:
•
Tap the stylus on a tab, radio button, checkbox and so on.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
53
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Navigating Using The Keyboard
4.1.2 Navigating Using The Keyboard
If your touchscreen has been disabled, you can use the keyboard rather than a stylus
to choose icons and navigate dialog boxes, display the desktop, and so on. If your
unit has already been fully configured and your application is launched at startup,
you’ll have little need for keyboard navigation.
Operation
Key or Key Combination
Switch between active applications
[ALT] [TAB]
Open task manager
[ALT] [ESC]
Move the cursor
Arrow keys
Open file, folder or icon
[ENTER]
Exit &amp; Save
[ENTER]
Close/Exit &amp; Do Not Save
[ESC]
Navigate Dialog Boxes
[TAB]
To move cursor up [SHIFT] [TAB]
To display the contents of the next ‘tab’ in
a dialog box [CTRL] [TAB]
Select Radio Button/Press Button
[SPACE]
Go to Start Menu
[BLUE][0]
Table 4.1 Keyboard Navigation
Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer, the 8525/8530 does not support key
chording (pressing two keys at the same time). You must press one key followed by
the next in sequence.
Refer to “Working With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 55 for additional
details about keyboard navigation.
54
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Working With Files, Folders And Programs
4.2 Working With Files, Folders And Programs
Figure 4.1 Working With Windows Icons
•
Double-tap on the appropriate icon – either a folder icon, a program icon or
a file icon – to open or launch your selection.
4.3 The Startup Desktop
When the 8525/8530 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed. Any
applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.
Note:
The startup folder is located in \Windows\StartUp and
\Flash Disk\StartUp.
Figure 4.2 The 8525/8530 Startup Desktop
•
Double-tap on the icon to open a window or, in the case of an application
icon, launch an application.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
55
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
The Desktop Icons
4.3.1 The Desktop Icons
The icons displayed in the startup desktop operate in much the same way as those
displayed on any standard PC desktop that is running Windows&reg;.
My Computer
Choosing this icon displays the contents of your 8525/8530 computer. If you’re not
sure how to work with the files, folders and programs displayed, refer to “Working
With Files, Folders And Programs” on page 55.
Recycle Bin
This option temporarily contains items that were deleted, allowing you to either
permanently delete or restore these items.
Internet Explorer
Choosing this icon launches Internet Explorer – a standard Windows CE .NET version.
Keep in mind that your supervisor will need to set up access using the Internet Options
and the Network and Dial-up Connections icons in the Control Panel.
Remote Desktop Connection
This option allows your 8525/8530 to communicate with a remote desktop PC.
“Remote Desktop Connection” on page 71 provides a website with step-by-step
instructions.
56
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
The Taskbar
4.3.2 The Taskbar
Figure 4.3 The Taskbar
The 8525/8530 is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen. It displays
icons through which you can view the internal battery capacity, the radio signal
quality of your unit, and so on. If the vehicle-mount is attached to a peripheral
device, an associated icon is displayed. In addition, the taskbar displays the
application(s) currently running on your unit and the security level assigned to your
8525/8530.
The taskbar also displays active modifier keys – [SHIFT], [ALT], [CTRL], [BLUE]
and [ORANGE]. Keys that have been locked “on” are displayed in uppercase
letters. For example, if you press the [CTRL] key twice to lock it “on”, it is
displayed as CTRL KEY in the taskbar.
4.3.2.1
•
4.3.2.2
Using The Taskbar
Using the stylus, tap on the indicator you want to view – the radio icon for
example – to display a dialog box outlining radio communication information.
Customizing The Taskbar
To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require:
•
From the Start Menu, tap on the Settings option, and then on the Taskbar
and Start Menu option
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
57
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
The Start Menu
The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed.
Figure 4.4 Taskbar And Start Menu Settings
•
Note:
Tap the stylus on the items you want to activate or deactivate. A check mark
indicates active items.
The Advanced tab allows you to tap on a Clear button to delete the contents of the Documents folder.
4.4 The Start Menu
Note:
Some of the Start Menu items may be disabled based on the current
8525/8530 security settings.
The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with. It is available
from the startup desktop or from within any application.
To display the menu:
•
Tap on the Start button in the taskbar. Tap on the item in the menu with
which you want to work.
Figure 4.5 Start Menu
58
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
The Desktop
4.4.1 The Desktop
Choosing the Desktop option from the Start Menu displays the 8525/8530 desktop.
4.4.2 Security Levels
Choosing the Security option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which
you can define the access level for the 8525/8530 – Supervisor or User.
Figure 4.6 Security Level
Assigning The Supervisor Security Level
The security level is represented by an icon in the shape of a lock in the taskbar. The
security levels define the options accessible to the operator in the Start Menu and
the taskbar. By default, the security level is set to User, restricting access to only the
most basic Start Menu items.
To allow access to all the Start Menu and taskbar options:
•
•
•
Tap on the radio button next to Supervisor.
Tap in the Password field, and type the Supervisor level password – the
default password is 123456.
Tap on OK – you can now access all menu items in the Start Menu along
with the icons in the taskbar.
Accessing Teklogix Level Security
Important:
The Teklogix security level is reserved for authorized Psion Teklogix personnel only.
Before you can access Teklogix security level, you need to set the security level
to Supervisor.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
59
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Security Levels
In the Security Level dialog box (see Figure 4.6 on page 59):
•
Tap on the Configure button.
Figure 4.7 Configuring Security Levels
•
Tap on the checkbox next to Allow Teklogix Security Level to enable this
option, and then tap on OK.
Figure 4.8 Security Levels
The Teklogix level security is now available in the Security Level dialog box.
•
Tap on the radio button next to Teklogix. To activate this security level,
you’ll need to enter the appropriate Psion Teklogix level password in
the Password field.
Changing A Password
Note:
60
Keep in mind that this is the same password as that assigned through the
Password control panel applet. Refer to “Control Panel Icons” on
page 72.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Security Levels
To assign a password:
•
•
Choose a security level, and enter the existing password in the Password field
Choose the Set Password button.
A dialog box labelled Password Properties is displayed.
•
•
Type the new password in the Password text box
In the Confirm Password text box, retype the new password.
Configuring Security
Choosing the Configure button displays the Configure Security dialog box.
Figure 4.9 Configuring Security
In addition to allowing the operator to access the Teklogix security level (see
“Accessing Teklogix Level Security” on page 59), this dialog box allows you to
determine which security levels will have an associated icon displayed in the
taskbar. By default, a security icon is not displayed for user-level security.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
61
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Programs
4.4.3 Programs
•
Tap on Programs to display a sub-menu of options.
Figure 4.10 Program Sub-Menu
This sub-menu allows you to choose ActiveSync and Command Prompt, and you
can access the Internet Explorer, installed applications (e.g., Open Tekterm),
Remote Desktop Connection and Windows Explorer.
ActiveSync&reg;
This option allows you to connect to another device using ActiveSync.
Command Prompt
Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt. At the prompt, you
can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive.
Internet Explorer
The 8525/8530 is equipped with Microsoft&reg; Internet Explorer consistent with all
Windows CE .NET devices on the market. You can access the Internet Options icon
through the Start Menu under Settings&gt;Control Panel or by double-tapping on the
desktop icon labelled My Computer and then, double-tapping on the Control Panel icon.
Remote Desktop Connection
Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525/8530 application used to connect to a
Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine
using the 8525/8530 (Windows CE .NET device). “Remote Desktop Connection”
on page 71 provides a website with details about this option.
62
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Shortcuts
Windows Explorer
The Windows Explorer installed on your 8525/8530 is consistent with all Windows
CE .NET 4.2 devices. You can access this option either from the Start Menu under
Programs&gt;Windows Explorer.
4.4.4 Shortcuts
Figure 4.11 Shortcuts Sub-Menu
The System Tray
If your touchscreen is not enabled, you can use the System Tray option to access the
icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen. The taskbar displays indicators such
as a radio signal icon and the security level. These indicators are attached to dialog
boxes that provide additional information.
•
Choose System Tray from the Shortcuts Start Menu.
When System Tray is chosen, the taskbar icons become accessible. To display the
dialog box attached to an icon:
•
•
Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon – for example – the security icon.
Press [ENTER] to display the security level dialog box.
Cycle Tasks
When Cycle Tasks is selected (and the Task Manager is not open), you can cycle
through active applications. To choose this option:
•
•
Choose Cycle Tasks, or
Press [ALT] [TAB].
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
63
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Settings
The Task Manager
The Task Manager option allows you to switch to another task or to end an active
task. To display the task manager window:
•
•
Tap on Task Manager in the Start Menu, or
Press [ALT] [ESC].
Figure 4.12 Task Manager
4.4.5 Settings
•
Tap on Settings to display a sub-menu of options.
Figure 4.13 Settings Sub-Menu
Control Panel
The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware, the operating
system and the shell. If your 8525/8530 is running with the Psion Teklogix Tekterm
application or another application, additional configuration applets may appear in
the Control Panel.
64
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Run
Network And Dial-Up Connections
The Network and Dial-up Connections window allows you to configure an 802.11
radio or execute an existing configuration. Refer to “Configuring An IEEE 802.11
Radio” on page 19 for radio setup details.
Taskbar And Start Menu
The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can
customize the taskbar, selecting the icons that will be displayed. Refer to
“Customizing The Taskbar” on page 57 for additional details about this option.
4.4.6 Run
Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you
can enter the name of the program, folder or document you want to open or launch.
Figure 4.14 Run Dialog Box
4.4.7 Shutdown
Choosing Shutdown displays a sub-menu of options, including Suspend, Warm
Reset and Cold Reset.
Figure 4.15 Shutdown Sub-Menu
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
65
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Using A Dialog Box
Note:
This menu varies slightly depending on the security level chosen. When
the 8525/8530 is set to User level, the Shutdown option is replaced by
Suspend. A sub-menu is not available.
At Teklogix security level, an additional option is available in the
sub-menu – Bootloader. This option behaves like cold-reset, except
that the 8525/8530 starts Bootloader rather than Windows CE .NET.
Suspend
The Suspend option suspends the 8525/8530 immediately – this is equivalent to
turning the vehicle-mount off.
Warm Reset
The Warm Reset option resets the 8525/8530, leaving all saved files and (registry)
settings intact. Any unsaved data is lost.
Cold Reset
The Cold Reset option resets the 8525/8530. Any files not stored in permanent
memory are lost. However, the registry settings are saved.
4.5 Using A Dialog Box
A dialog box (like the samples in Figure 4.16) appears when you need to make
selections and enter further information.
Checkbox
66
Dropdown Menu
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Button
Chapter 4: Working With Windows CE .NET
Using A Dialog Box
Tabs
Radio
Button
Textbox
Figure 4.16 Navigating Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes contain one or more of the following elements:
Tab: A tab separates different elements of a dialog box. Tap on a tab to display the
associated information.
Textbox: A textbox requires that you type information. Highlight the textbox with
the stylus and then type the appropriate information.
Dropdown: This type of menu is identified by up and down arrows next to the
dropdown menu to indicate that additional options are available. Tap the stylus on
the arrow to display the options in the menu.
Checkbox: This box allows you to select or deselect an option. To select or deselect
a checkbox, tap the stylus on the checkbox to select or deselect it.
Radio buttons: These buttons allow you to choose from a number of options. For
example, in the sample screen in Figure 4.16 on page 67 you can choose to ‘Obtain
an IP address via DHCP’ or ‘Specify an IP address’. Tap the stylus on the button
to select or deselect it.
Buttons: This type of button allows you to ‘Save’, ‘Delete’ and so on the options
you’ve chosen in a dialog box. Tap the stylus on the button to activate it.
Saving Your Choices: Once you’ve made all your changes, tap on OK to save your
changes and exit the window.
Note:
A dialog box item that is displayed in grey text indicates that it is not currently available.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
67
5
CONFIGURATION
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
Remote Desktop Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pocket PC Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Panel Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.1 Display Background . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.2 Display Appearance . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1.3 Display Backlight . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Keyboard Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.1 Key Repeat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.2 Keyboard Backlight . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.3 Keyboard One Shot Modes . . . . . .
5.5.2.4 Keyboard Macro Keys . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.5 Unicode Mapping . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2.6 Scancode Remapping . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties . . . . . . . . .
5.5.3.1 Volume Adjustments. . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4 Power Management Properties . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.1 Power Suspend. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.4.2 Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5 Stylus Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.1 Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity . . . .
5.5.5.2 Touchscreen Calibration . . . . . . . .
5.5.5.3 Options – Disabling The Touchscreen.
5.5.6 Certificate Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Narrow Band Radio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.1 Info Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.2 Channel Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.3 Protocol Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.4 Power Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6.5 Radio Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Bluetooth Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 71
. 71
. 71
. 72
. 76
. 76
. 77
. 77
. 78
. 79
. 79
. 80
. 81
. 82
. 84
. 86
. 88
. 89
. 89
. 90
. 91
. 91
. 92
. 92
. 93
. 93
. 94
. 94
. 98
.102
.105
.106
.108
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
69
Chapter 5: Configuration
5.7.1 The Devices Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 The Server Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2.1 Outgoing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Active Conn. Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.4 The Properties Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.5 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone. . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Total Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.1 Creating A Backup Profile . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8.2 Restoring A Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 Input Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.10 IPv6 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11 Scanner Properties Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.1 Scanner Barcodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2 Non-Decoded Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.1 Non-Decoded Options . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.2 Code 39 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.3 Code 128 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.4 EAN 13 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.5 EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.6 UPC A Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.7 UPC E Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.8 Codabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.9 Code 93 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.10 Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.11 Interleaved 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.12 MSI Plessey . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.13 Discrete 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.2.14 IATA 2 of 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3 Decoded (External) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3.1 Tether Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.3.2 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.11.4 Translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Setup
5.12.1 Communities Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.2 Trap Destination Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12.3 Permitted Hosts Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
109
112
112
113
114
115
120
120
124
124
127
128
128
129
130
131
133
134
136
136
137
137
138
138
138
139
139
140
141
141
142
143
144
146
148
150
Chapter 5: Configuration
Remote Desktop Connection
5.1 Remote Desktop Connection
Remote Desktop Connection is an 8525/8530 application used to connect to a
Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a “session” on the Server machine,
using the 8525/8530 (Windows CE .NET device).
Refer to the following website for step-by-step information about setting up this
connection:
http://www.microsoft.com/WindowsXP/pro/using/howto/gomobile/remotedesktop/default.asp
5.2 Pocket PC Compatibility
The 8525/8530 supports the AYGShell API set that allows PocketPC-compatible
applications to run on the vehicle-mount. Microsoft&reg; Windows&reg; CE.NET 4.2 is
designed to include application programming interface (API) compatibility support
for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in 8525/8530s running
Windows&reg; CE.NET 4.2.
The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the
application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002-based
applications and Windows CE .NET 4.2-based devices:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-us/dncenet /html/WINCENET_CEPCC_App.asp
5.3 The Control Panel
The Windows CE .NET Control Panel provides a group of icons through which you
can set a variety of system-wide properties, such as mouse sensitivity, network
configuration and the desktop color scheme.
Note:
If you are uncertain how to move around a dialog box and make selections, review “Using A Dialog Box” on page 66.
When the 8525/8530 boots up, the startup desktop (shell) is displayed, and any
applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately.
To access the Windows CE .NET Control Panel:
•
Tap on the Start button in the taskbar to display the Start Menu. Tap on
Settings&gt;Control Panel.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
71
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your 8525/8530.
Figure 5.1 Control Panel
5.4 Control Panel Icons
The Windows CE .NET Control Panel provides a group of icons that allow you to
customize and adjust settings on your 8525/8530.
Date/Time
Allows you to set the current Month, Date, Time and Time Zone on your unit.
Display
Changes the appearance (window colour scheme) on the unit desktop. This
applet can also be used to adjust the backlight level.
Keyboard
Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated
characters. It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and
intensity. Additional tabs also allow the configuration of macros and
scanner key remapping.
Volume &amp; Sound
Allows you to adjust the volume of the beep that is emitted to indicate
events like warnings, key clicks and screen taps.
72
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 8525/8530 units. The beeper
volume and the conditions under which it sounds are tailored from within
the application installed on your unit.
Mouse Properties
Allows you to customize the sensitivity and speed of the stylus double-tap.
Owner
Provides fields in which you can specify owner information. A ‘Notes’ tab
allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is
powered up. ‘Network ID’ tab information is used to access network resources.
(This information should be provided by your System Administrator.)
Password
Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit.
Once assigned, password access cannot be circumvented so it is important
that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place. Refer to
“Security Levels” on page 59 for details.
Power
Allows you to define if, why and when the unit will automatically switch to
Suspend state. It also allows you to define which Card Slots are active and
to turn power for the card slots (PCMCIA and SD/MMC) on and off.
Regional Settings
Allows you to specify the local language the display text will use along
with the format of numbers, currency, time and date for your region.
Remove Programs
Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit. To remove a program, choose it and then tap on the Remove button.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
73
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Stylus
Adjusts how Windows CE .NET recognizes your double-tap (as slow or
rapid successive taps).
Under the ‘Calibration’ tab, you can recalibrate your touchscreen by
tapping on the ‘Recalibrate’ button and following the directions on the calibration screen.
System
Displays system and memory properties. Under the Memory tab, you can
allocate memory between storage memory and program memory.
Dialing
Specifies dialing settings, including area code, country code, dial type and
the code to disable call waiting. You can store multiple patterns – for example, ‘Work’, ‘Home’, and so on using this dialog box.
Certificates
A public key is transmitted as part of a certificate. The certificate assigned
through this icon is used to ensure that the submitted public key is, in fact,
the public key that belongs to the submitter. The client checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the client
explicitly trusts. “Certificate Assignment” on page 93 directs you to the
appropriate setup information.
PC Connection
Enables direct connections to a desktop computer. Selecting the ‘Change Connection’ button allows you to change the type of direct connect to your PC.
Input Panel
The 8525/8530 is equipped with the framework for a Soft Input Panel (SIP)
should you need to design your own SIP. On the 8530 only, when a keyboard is not connected, a soft keyboard is available.
74
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Control Panel Icons
Teklogix Scanners
Used to set up scanner parameters and choose the bar code symbologies
that the 8525/8530 scanner will successfully read.
Network And Dial-up Connections
Displays a network window from which the 8525/8530 radio can be configured and an existing configuration can be executed. Refer to “Configuring
An IEEE 802.11 Radio” on page 19 for details.
Internet Options
Used to configure your Internet browser including options such as identifying the default and search page that the browser applies when connecting to
the Internet, setting the cache size, specifying the Internet connection
options, and defining the security level that is applied when browsing.
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the protocol used to
monitor and manage devices attached to a TCP/IP network.
Bluetooth
A short-range wireless technology that enables data communication
between devices. It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone as a data modem, exchanging information with other Bluetooth devices and providing network access.
Total Recall
This is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and
setting over cold boots. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept
and is extended to incorporate powerful advanced features.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
75
Chapter 5: Configuration
Basic Setup
IPv6 Support
Refers to a new Internet Protocol specification (version 6) that has been
published to use 128-bit IP addresses (replacing version 4).
Narrow Band Radio
This icon is displayed only if a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit. It
provides access to the Narrow Band setup screens.
5.5 Basic Setup
5.5.1 Display Properties
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Display icon.
Figure 5.2 Choosing The Display Icon
76
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Background
5.5.1.1
Display Background
The Background tab allows you to adjust the 8525/8530 display background.
•
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Background tab.
Figure 5.3 Display Contrast Properties
This option allows you to change the background colour or add an image.
5.5.1.2
•
Display Appearance
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Appearance tab.
Figure 5.4 Display Appearance Properties
This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
77
Chapter 5: Configuration
Display Backlight
5.5.1.3
Display Backlight
The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time when the 8525/8530 is
in use (key press, scanner trigger or data received from the host). The Display
Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the
backlight along with how long the display will maintain the specified intensity.
Note:
•
Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only.
In the Display Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.
Figure 5.5 Display Backlight Properties
Note:
Backlight changes take affect immediately. You do not need to reset
the 8525/8530.
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the backlight. Sliding the bar to
the left lowers the light intensity, and sliding it to the right raises the intensity.
Bright For
The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the
backlight stays on at the configured intensity when a unit is not in use.
Dim For
The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that
the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity (dimmed backlight) when a
unit is not in use.
External Power Checkbox
When you select the checkbox next to ‘When using external power keep the
backlight always ON.’, the backlight remains ON at the configured intensity when
78
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Properties
the 8525/8530 is operating with external power (not internal battery power). If the
8525/8530 is drawing power from a battery, this option is ignored and the other
parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take affect.
5.5.2 Keyboard Properties
This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the
repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of
the [BLUE] and [ORANGE] modifier keys. This dialog box also allows you to
define macro keys and Unicode characters.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Keyboard icon.
Figure 5.6 Choosing The Keyboard Icon
5.5.2.1
•
Key Repeat
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Repeat tab.
Figure 5.7 Key Repeat Properties
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
79
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Backlight
Enable Character Repeat
Tapping in the checkbox next to this option enables the key behaviour you specify in
this dialog box.
Repeat Delay
The repeat delay chosen for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds
between repeat characters. Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay
between key repeats while sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time.
Repeat Rate
The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key
you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). Sliding the bar to
the left slows the repeat rate, and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate.
Note:
Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and
rate settings you’ve chosen.
5.5.2.2
•
Keyboard Backlight
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Backlight tab.
Figure 5.8 Keyboard Backlight Properties
Intensity
This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 8525/8530 keyboard
backlight. Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity, and
sliding it to the right lightens the intensity.
80
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard One Shot Modes
ON For
The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines the duration of time that the
keyboard backlight stays on when a unit is not in use.
Note:
Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘When using external power, keep
the backlight always ON’ forces the keypad backlight to remain on
when the unit is operating with external power such as vehicle battery
or A/C adaptor.
5.5.2.3
•
Keyboard One Shot Modes
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the One Shots tab.
Figure 5.9 Keyboard One Shot Properties
The options in this tab allows you to determine how modifier keys on your
8525/8530 behave. For each modifier key–[ALT], [SHIFT], [CTRL], [ORANGE]
and [BLUE]–you have the following options in the drop-down menu: Lock, OneShot, and OneShot/Lock.
Note:
Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not
these keys are locked on. For example, if the [ORANGE] key is locked
‘on’, the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it in uppercase characters – ORANGE KEY. If this key is displayed in lowercase characters in the
taskbar, you’ll know that the orange key is not locked. It will become inactive following a key press.
Important:
Once you’ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key, you
need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate
your selection.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
81
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Macro Keys
Lock
If you choose Lock from the drop-down menu, pressing a modifier key once locks it
‘on’ until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off.
OneShot
If you choose OneShot, the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed.
OneShot/Lock
OneShot/Lock allows you to combine these functions. When you choose this
option and you press the modifier key once, it remains active only until the next key
is pressed.
If you press the modifier key twice, it is locked ‘on’, remaining active until the
modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it ‘off’.
5.5.2.4
•
Keyboard Macro Keys
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Macros tab.
Figure 5.10 Macro Dialog Box
A macro has 200 programmable characters (or “positions”). The macro keys can be
programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of
executable keys including [ENTER], [BKSP] and [DEL] ([BLUE]-[BKSP]),
function keys and arrow keys.
82
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Keyboard Macro Keys
Recording And Saving A Macro
You can program up to 12 macro keys.
•
In the Macro menu, highlight a macro key number – for example, macro 1
to assign a macro to macro key [M1]. Tap on the Record Macro button.
A message screen is displayed instructing you to ‘Please Enter Key Strokes’.
Figure 5.11 Recording A Macro
•
Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key. You can
type text and numbers, and you can program the function of special keys
into a macro.
Note:
Tap on the ‘Stop Recording’ button at any time to suspend the process.
•
When you’ve finished recording your macro sequence, press the key
sequence – [CTRL] [ALT] [ENTER].
A new screen displays the macro sequence you created. The Save Macro button is
highlighted.
•
Note:
Tap on the Save Macro button.
If you want to discard the macro you’ve just created, tap on the Discard
Macro button.
Executing A Macro
To execute a macro:
•
Press the macro key to which you’ve assigned the macro. For example, if
you created a macro for macro key ‘1’, press [M1] to execute the macro.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
83
Chapter 5: Configuration
Unicode Mapping
Deleting A Macro
To delete a macro:
•
•
5.5.2.5
•
In the Macros tab, tap on the macro number you want to delete.
Tap on the Delete Macro button.
Unicode Mapping
In the Keyboard Properties dialog box, open the Unicode Mapping tab.
Figure 5.12 Unicode Mapping
The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and
[CTRL] and [SHIFT] states to Unicode™ values. This tab shows the configured
Unicode character along with the Unicode value. Keep in mind that Unicode
configurations are represented as hexidecimal rather than decimal values.
All user-defined Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order
of virtual key value, and then by order of the shift state. If a Unicode mapping is not
listed, the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value.
84
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Unicode Mapping
Adding And Changing Unicode Values
Important:
•
Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the
Keyboard Properties dialog box.
Tap on the Add/Change button.
Figure 5.13 Adding And Change Unicode Values
•
•
Note:
Tap on a value in the Unicode mapping list – in the sample screen above, a
value will be assigned to virtual key 0 (VK 0).
Tap the stylus in the Unicode Mapping field, and type a Unicode value for
the highlighted key.
To add a shifted state – [SHIFT] and/or [CTRL], tap the checkbox next to
‘SHIFT Pressed’ and/or ‘CTRL Pressed’. to select the shift state you want
to assign.
Removing Unicode Values
•
In the Unicode Mapping tab, highlight the item you want to delete, and tap
the stylus on the Remove button.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
85
Chapter 5: Configuration
Scancode Remapping
5.5.2.6
Scancode Remapping
A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard. Every
key has a unique scancode that is mapped to a virtual key, a function or a macro.
Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the
keyboard. A key can be remapped to send a virtual key (e.g. VK_F represents the
‘F’ key; VK_RETURN represents the [ENTER/ON] key, etc.), perform a function
(e.g. turn the scanner on, change volume/contrast, etc.) or run a macro.
There are three different tables of scancode mappings: the Normal table, the Blue
table and the Orange table. The Normal table defines unmodified key presses; the
Blue table defines key presses that occur when the [BLUE] modifier is on; the
Orange table defines key presses that occur when the [ORANGE] modifier is on.
The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three
tables using the Scancode Remapping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties
dialog box.
Figure 5.14 Scancode Remapping
The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the Scancodes in
hexidecimal. If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key, that virtual key is
displayed in the next column labelled ‘V-Key’. A virtual key that is ‘Shifted’ or
‘Unshifted’ is displayed in the third column labelled ‘Function’.
If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro, the first and second columns
remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key
number (e.g., Macro 2).
86
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Scancode Remapping
Adding A Remap
To add a new remapping:
•
Tap the stylus on the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed.
Figure 5.15 Remapping A Key
•
Note:
Type the scan code in hexidecimal in the field labelled Scancode:
The Label: field displays the default function of the scancode you
are remapping.
Virtual Key, Function And Macro
The radio buttons along the side of the dialog box allow you to define to what the
scan code will be remapped: Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
When Virtual Key is selected, you can choose to force [SHIFT] to be on or off
when the virtual key is sent. If No Force is selected, the shift state is dependent on
whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent.
When Function is selected, a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box.
When Macro is selected, the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the
dialog box.
•
•
Choose Virtual Key, Function or Macro.
Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box, and tap
on OK.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
87
Chapter 5: Configuration
Volume And Sound Properties
Editing A Scancode Remap
To edit a scancode:
•
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, tap on the remap you want to edit.
Tap on the Edit button, and make the appropriate changes.
Tap on OK to save your changes.
Removing A Remap
To delete a remap:
•
•
In the Scancode Remapping tab, highlight the scancode you want to delete,
and tap on the Remove button.
Tap on OK
5.5.3 Volume And Sound Properties
Note:
•
Sounds (wave files) cannot be reproduced on 8525/8530 units. The conditions under which 8525/8530s emit sounds are tailored from within the
application installed on your unit.
In the Control Panel, choose the Volume &amp; Sounds icon.
Figure 5.16 Choosing The Volume Icon
88
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Volume Adjustments
5.5.3.1
Volume Adjustments
Figure 5.17 Volume Settings
•
•
Slide the volume button upward to increase the beeper volume or downward to decrease the beeper volume.
Under the heading Enable sounds for, enable the conditions under which
you want the 8525/8530 to emit a beep.
5.5.4 Power Management Properties
This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit’s internal
backup battery capacity and indicates the power source of the 8525/8530.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Power icon.
Figure 5.18 Choosing The Power Icon
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
89
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Suspend
5.5.4.1
Note:
•
Power Suspend
A Battery tab is only available when the security level is set to Teklogix.
In the Power Properties dialog box, open the Suspend tab.
Figure 5.19 Power Suspend Properties
Switch State To Suspend
When the 8525/8530 is idle – not receiving any user input (a key touch, a scan, and
so on) or system activity (serial data, an activity initiated by an application, and so
on), the value assigned in the Switch State To Suspend field determines when the
unit will go to suspend state (appear to be off).
When the time in the Suspend field elapses without any activity, the unit enters
Suspend state. In Suspend state, the 8525/8530 CPU enters a sleep state, and the
radio is shut off. The state of the device (RAM contents) is preserved. Pressing
[ENTER] wakes the system from suspend state. When the 8525/8530 is in suspend
state, the network connection is broken immediately; you must re-establish the
network connection.
90
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Card Slots
5.5.4.2
Card Slots
Figure 5.20 Activating Card Slots
This tab is used to enable or disable power to the individual PC Card and SDIO slots
in your unit.
5.5.5 Stylus Properties
Note:
•
Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit. If your screen
appears to require recalibration, contact your supervisor.
In the Control Panel, choose the Stylus icon.
Figure 5.21 Stylus Icon
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
91
Chapter 5: Configuration
Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity
5.5.5.1
•
Setting Double-Tap Sensitivity
In the Double-Tap tab, follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the
stylus when you tap on the touchscreen.
Figure 5.22 Setting Stylus Sensitivity
5.5.5.2
Touchscreen Calibration
Touchscreens rarely require recalibration. However, if your touchscreen has never
been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on
an item, you can use the Calibration tab to recalibrate the touchscreen.
•
Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button.
Figure 5.23 Calibrating The Touchscreen
•
92
Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Options – Disabling The Touchscreen
5.5.5.3
Options – Disabling The Touchscreen
Figure 5.24 Disabling The Touchscreen
•
Tap on the checkbox next to Disable the touch panel. The touchscreen will
not accept screen taps.
5.5.6 Certificate Assignment
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Certificate icon.
Figure 5.25 Certificates Icon
This dialog box is used in conjunction with 802.1x authentication to enhance
8525/8530 security.
Figure 5.26 Certificates Dialog Box
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
93
Chapter 5: Configuration
Narrow Band Radio Setup
For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client-side
devices (8525/8530s), refer to the following website:
www.microsoft.com/windows2000/techinfo/planning/walkthroughs/default.asp - &quot;Security Services&quot;
Note:
When importing certificates, the 8525/8530 only recognizes .cer files.
5.6 Narrow Band Radio Setup
Note:
•
Keep in mind that the Narrow Band icon is only visible in the Control
Panel when a Narrow Band radio is installed in the unit.
In the Control Panel, choose the Narrow Band Radio icon.
Figure 5.27 Narrow Band Icon
5.6.1 Info Tab
In the Narrow Band Radio dialog box, the Info tab displays information about the
radio – it cannot be edited.
Figure 5.28 Narrow Band Information
94
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Info Tab
The “Power” information in this screen indicates the power of the radio installed in
the unit – 0.5 or 1.0 W. The “Serial Number” is the identifier for the radio and is
used by the protocol when the “Auto Radio Address” parameter is enabled. The
“CIS Data” (Card Information Structure) is manufacturer information describing the
PC Card installed in the 8525/8530. “DSP x.x / FPGA 0xNN” indicates the
firmware revision of the radio’s DSP (x.x) and FPGA (0xNN) where x.x and NN
represent actual revision numbers.
Statistics Screen
•
Tap on the Statistics button to display the Protocol Statistics screen.
These statistics are updated every second while the dialog box is displayed.
Figure 5.29 Protocol Statistics
The following table provides a brief description of these statistics:
Statistic
Description
cq
Channel quality. See the description of the “Channel Switch Speed” parameter in the channel tab for more information on how “cq” affects channel
switching (see “Channel Switch Speed” on page 99).
ch
Current channel
sc
Monitor state of RF Link: LOCKED=0, LOCKPENDING=1, LOWCQWAIT=2, SCANNING=3, STARTUP=4, ABANDON=5
rm
Number of received messages, complete application messages
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
95
Chapter 5: Configuration
Info Tab
xm
Number of transmitted messages, complete application messages
rf
Number of received polls with attached message
xf
Number of transmitted frames
ra
Number of received radio link aborts
xi
Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages
rp
Number of received polls
xr
Number of transmitted retries
pt
Number of poll timeouts
xe
Number of transmitted errors
rssi
Received Signal Strength Indicator
Table 5.1 Protocol Statistics Descriptions
Low Level Screen
•
Tap on the Low Level tab to display the Low Level statistics screen.
Figure 5.30 Low Level Statistics Screen
Table 5.2 defines the elements of the Low Level statistics screen.
Statistic
RxOk
96
Description
Message buffers discarded due to lack of available receive buffers
RxHd
Message headers successfully received
RxBd
Message bodies successfully received
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Info Tab
RxEr
Message buffers received with detected errors
RxOv
Number of transmitted messages, complete application messages
TxOk
Message buffers successfully transmitted
TxEr
Message buffers which failed to transmit
CD
Number of carrier detect changes detected
Coll
Number of collisions detected
Tx D
Actual difference in time (in RTC ticks) between when the most recent transmit (with timestamp) was scheduled to start and when it actually started.
TxMD
Maximum &quot;Tx D&quot; value
Rx X
Number of extra characters received for last received message (due to delay
in host reporting back actual body size)
RxMx
Maximum &quot;Rx X&quot; value
MChg
Number of completed mode changes
Table 5.2 Low Level Statistics Descriptions
Default All Parameters
•
Tap on the Default all Parameters button to return all registry parameters
to default values.
When this button is pressed, a screen appears asking if you’re sure you want to
return all parameters to their default values.
•
Note:
Tap on the Yes button to return values to their default settings.
This button does not default the radio parameters set under the Radio tab.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
97
Chapter 5: Configuration
Channel Tab
5.6.2 Channel Tab
Figure 5.31 Channel Tab
Channel Number
This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 8525/8530. The
allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 20. The default value is 1.
Note:
The Channel Number dropdown menu displays only the channels that
have been enabled in the Channel Enable List.
Power Up Channel
When this parameter is enabled, the 8525/8530 begins communicating on the
channel specified in the Channel Number parameter when the unit is powered up.
This setting may prevent the migration of 8525/8530s to the same channel due to
uneven coverage in some sites.
If this parameter is disabled (unchecked), the unit will continue communicating on
the same channel that it was on before it was powered off.
98
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Channel Tab
Channel Enable List
•
Tap on the Channel Enable List button to display a dialog box listing
available channels.
Figure 5.32 Channel Enable Dialog Box
This dialog box is completed by default with all channels that have frequencies
configured. A checkmark indicates that a channel is enabled. An unchecked check
box indicates that the channel is disabled. The maximum number of channels
supported by the RA1001 Narrow Band radio is 20.
Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (Channel
Number) and makes it available for channel searching. For example, if Channel 1 is
the operating channel and all other channels are enabled, the 8525/8530 can roam
through all 20 channels.
Channel Switch Speed
This parameter changes the threshold the 8525/8530 uses to determine when
communication quality with a base station is unacceptable. When this threshold is
exceeded, the unit starts channel searching for a new base station.
Setting this parameter to “Slow” means a higher threshold – the 8525/8530 is more
tolerant of poor communication quality. When the channel quality of the
vehicle-mount radio drops below 46%, the unit monitors the channel quality for 15
timeout periods before searching for a new channel. If Channel Switch Speed is set
to “Fast”, the current channel is only monitored for up to 2 time-out periods before
channel switching begins.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
99
Chapter 5: Configuration
Channel Tab
Important:
“Fast” switch speed is most effective where coverage areas are
largely overlapping. If the coverage areas barely overlap, have
dead spots, or if the 8525/8530 frequently operates on the fringe
of coverage, this parameter should be set to “Slow”.
Channel Selection
Enabling “Manual Select” allows you to set the channel search order the 8525/8530
will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required. If this
parameter is enabled, the 8525/8530 uses the channel switching lists specified in the
Manual Switch Table. If this parameter is disabled (unchecked), the vehicle-mount
uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of
poor channel quality.
Warning:
It is not recommended that the &quot;Manual Select&quot; parameter be used
without a clear understanding of how to order the channel
sequences for optimum performance.
Manual Switch Table
•
Tap on the Set Switch Table button to display the Manual Switch Table
dialog box.
Figure 5.33 Manual Switch Table
100 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Channel Tab
This feature is used rarely. It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be
tightly controlled. The values in the “Channel” column are completed for you with
the enabled channels when this dialog box is opened. For each corresponding
enabled channel, the “List” column contains “0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0” values by default.
If communication quality falls below 46%, only the channels entered in the Manual
Switch Table are considered for channel switching. The channel search is carried out
in the order in which the channels were entered in the table.
To configure channel switching order for a particular channel:
•
Highlight the channel you want to edit, and tap on the Edit Channel List button.
Editing The Channel List
Figure 5.34 Edit Channel List
Only those channels that are enabled are displayed in the dropdown menus in the
Edit Channel List dialog box. The allowable values range from 0 to 20.
•
•
Tap on the arrow next to dropdown menu to scroll through the available
channels. Highlight the value you want to assign.
Once you’ve assigned the switching order, tap on the OK button to close
the dialog box.
The channel list is added to the selected channel in the Manual Switch Table dialog box.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
101
Chapter 5: Configuration
Protocol Tab
5.6.3 Protocol Tab
Figure 5.35 Protocol Tab
Enable Cellular Protocol
The value assigned to this parameter must be identical to the value assigned to the
corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix Network Controller, Wireless
Gateway or Base Station. A warm reset of the 8525/8530 is required before this
parameter can take effect.
If Enable Cellular Protocol is disabled (unchecked), the options in the Cellular Radio
Address frame are displayed in grey text indicating that they cannot be accessed.
Cellular Radio Address
Auto Radio Address
If Auto radio address is enabled, the 8525/8530 requests an automatically assigned
radio address. Manual radio address is displayed in grey text indicating that it cannot
be accessed.
Manual Radio Address
The value entered in the Manual Radio Address parameter is used to identify the
8525/8530 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for
each unit.
Note:
This parameter is set to ‘0’ (an out-of-range value) by default to block
102 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Protocol Tab
radio communication when the unit is initially powered up. This prevents
several new terminals from attempting to communicate with the same
default terminal number at initial power up. Once the default value is
changed, it cannot be set back to ‘0’.
Polling
The default values for the Polling parameters are dependent on the value assigned to
the Modulation / Baud Rate parameter in the Radio tab.
Modulation / Baud Rate
Sync Delay
Window Delay Poll Timeout
4 Level / 19200
17
20
20
4 Level / 9600
17
23
25
2 Level / 9600
17
19
22
2 Level / 4800
25
23
37
Table 5.3 Polling Parameters
Sync Delay
Warning:
This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting
without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing.
The Sync Delay parameter specifies the delay between the base station transmission
and the first response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this
parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system.
The allowable range for this parameter is between 1 and 40.
Window Delay
Important:
The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from
the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of
the radio protocol.
This parameter specifies the amount of time (in milliseconds) the 8525/8530 should
add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive/transmit
switching characteristics of the radio. The value assigned must be compatible with
other units and base stations in the system. The default setting of 19 is based on the
requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
103
Chapter 5: Configuration
Protocol Tab
Poll Timeout
This parameter (in units of 16.6 ms) sets the time-out value used for automatic
channel switching. “Poll Timeout” is the time during which the 8525/8530 should
detect at least one poll from a base station. As each “Poll Timeout” passes without a
successful poll from the base station, the 8525/8530 channel quality decreases. If the
channel quality falls to below 46%, the terminal begins searching for a new channel.
A value from 1 to 200 can be assigned to this parameter.
Late TX Limit
The value entered for this parameter (measured in milliseconds) sets the maximum
allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which an
8525/8530 can make a transmission. After this threshold, the transmission will not
be attempted and the 8525/8530 will try again at the next opportunity. For example,
suppose this parameter is set to 5. From the beginning of the response window, the
8525/8530 can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission. Beyond this
threshold, the transmission is not attempted. The vehicle-mount waits for the next
opportunity.
The allowable range for this parameter is from 1 and 10 – the default value is 2.
Test Polling Values
•
Tap on the Test Polling Values button to test the polling values indicated in
this dialog box without committing them to memory.
To commit the new polling values to memory:
•
Tap on the OK button – the dialog box is closed and the new values
are saved.
To discard the new values, and retain the existing values:
•
Tap on the X button at the top of the dialog box.
104 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Power Tab
5.6.4 Power Tab
Figure 5.36 Power Tab
Enable Power Saving
When this parameter is checked, power saving is enabled.
Idle Poll Limit
Note:
The “Idle Poll Limit” parameter is only used when “Enable Power Saving” is enabled.
This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities – base station polls
with available response windows – must be consecutively skipped before the
8525/8530 places the radio into power-down mode for power saving. The allowable
range for this parameter is from 1 to 200. The default value is 10.
Lower values cause the vehicle-mount to enter power saving mode quickly,
extending battery life but reducing 8525/8530 responsiveness. Higher values
increase responsiveness but decrease battery life.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
105
Chapter 5: Configuration
Radio Tab
Power Off Time
This parameter determines the amount of time (in seconds) the 8525/8530 radio
stays in power-down mode when a power down period has been initiated. “Power
Off Time” is only used when the “Enable Power Saving” parameter is enabled.
The allowable range for this parameter is 1 to 60.
5.6.5 Radio Tab
Figure 5.37 Radio Tab
Modulation/Baud Rate
The options in the Modulation / Baud Rate dropdown menu are: 2 Level/4800,
2 Level/9600, 4 Level/9600 and 4 Level/19200. The value assigned to this
parameter must be identical to the corresponding parameter in the Psion Teklogix
Base Station. This parameter is stored in the radio’s non-volatile memory. The
default value for Modulation/Baud Rate is 2 Level/9600
Data Squelch
“Data Squelch” controls the radio receiver, cutting it off when the signal is too weak
for reception of anything but noise. Receive Signal Strength Indicator values below
the “Data Squelch” threshold prevent further processing of the receive signal while
higher values allow further processing. The allowable range is 0 to 100 with a
default value of 0.
106 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Radio Tab
In noisy environments, this value can be increased to reject noise. In environments
with less noise, this value can be decreased to allow the received signal and increase
range. This parameter is stored in the radio’s non-volatile memory.
Test Squelch
•
Tap on the Test Squelch button to prompt the radio to use the &quot;Data
Squelch&quot; value without committing it to the radio’s non-volatile memory –
in other words, to ‘test’ the value assigned to the “Data Squelch” parameter.
To commit the new “Data Squelch” value to the radio’s non-volatile memory:
•
Tap on the OK button – the dialog box is closed and the new value is saved.
To discard the new value, and keep the old “Data Squelch” value:
•
Tap on the X button at the top of the dialog box. The old value is sent to the
protocol driver.
Frequency Table
•
Tap on the Frequency button to display the Frequency Table dialog box.
Figure 5.38
•
Tap on the Copy “Receive” to “Transmit” button to copy the contents of
the “Receive” fields into the corresponding “Transmit” fields.
When you tap on this button, a warning box is displayed asking “Copy all the Rx
frequencies to the Tx frequencies?”
•
Tap on the Yes button to go ahead or No to stop the copy process.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
107
Chapter 5: Configuration
Bluetooth Setup
Statistics
•
Tap this button to display communication statistics.
Refer to “Statistics Screen” beginning on page 95 for details about this screen.
Advanced
This button launches the “Radio Test Application”.
5.7 Bluetooth Setup
Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is
intended for Personal Area Networks (PAN). The technology is based on a
short-range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2.4 GHz. When two
Bluetooth-equipped devices come within a 2 meter range of each other, they can
establish a connection. Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio-based link, it does not
require a line-of-sight connection in order to communicate.
Note:
•
The Bluetooth radio card uses an internal antenna.
In the Control Panel, choose the Bluetooth Device Properties icon to
display the Bluetooth Manager screen.
Figure 5.39 Bluetooth Icon
The Bluetooth Manager dialog box is used to display the other Bluetooth devices
with which you can communicate.
108 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Devices Tab
5.7.1 The Devices Tab
Figure 5.40 Bluetooth Controls Dialog Box
Scan
•
Tap on the Scan button to list available devices.
Wait for the 8525/8530 to complete its scan (approximately 20 seconds). When
scanning starts, the Scan button will change to Stop – if necessary, you can tap on
this button to stop the process. Once scanning is complete, all discovered devices
will be displayed in the list box, with Name, Address, Active status, and PIN
information.
Note:
During the scanning process, addresses are located first, followed by
names. Only the names of devices that are within the Bluetooth radio coverage range will be retrieved.
The Active column indicates whether any service is activated for that device. When
a service is activated, the device is displayed in the list even when it is not detected
during the scan.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
109
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Devices Tab
The PIN column indicates whether you have a PIN (password) set for the device.
At this point you can either query for services or set the PIN for each device. Once
you highlight a device in the list box, both the Services and Set PIN buttons become
available.
Services
A discovered device may display several service profiles that it can use to
communicate, and you will want to activate the type you need. Supported profiles
that can be activated include: DUN (Dial-Up Networking service), Printer (serial
service), and LANPPP (LANAccessUsingPPP service). ASync (ActiveSync) is
another available profile.
•
To start the service scan, highlight a device in the Devices tab list, and then
click on the Services button or double-click on the device entry.
Note:
If the remote device is out of reach or turned off, it can take a considerable amount of time for the Services dialog box to appear – it may appear
to be frozen.
Once the device’s service profiles are displayed in the Services list box:
•
Highlight the service to be activated.
•
Press [SPACE] or right-click to display the Activation menu.
The Activation menu contains four options – Activate, Authenticate, Outgoing and
Encrypt.
Once the service is successfully activated, the assigned port (if applicable) will
appear in the Port column of the Services list box. You can choose to use BSP or
COM as the port name. BSP is the latest Microsoft Bluetooth stack standard, but
older applications assume serial ports are COM. When using COM as the port name,
the Bluetooth manager will try to find and use a free port between COM7 and
COM9. When using BSP as the port name, BSP2 to BSP9 are available for use. The
port is available as soon as it is activated.
Note:
The CH column shows the RFCOMM channel of the service if the
service is RFCOMM-based. This information is not generally needed
except for debugging purposes.
110 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Devices Tab
To add a service to the Outgoing port, an active service must first be deactivated.
Then you can choose the ‘Outgoing’ option from the Activation menu (highlight a
service, right-click or press the [SPACE] bar to display the Activation menu).
The Authentication and Encryption options can be changed only before activation.
To change these after activation, deactivate the service first, then change the options.
Once a service is activated, all the information regarding the service, including the
RFCOMM channel number, is saved in the registry. (Some remote devices may
change their RFCOMM channel numbers when they reboot, so your saved setting
may not work when the remote device is rebooted. In that case, you must deactivate
the service and reactivate it to detect the current RFCOMM channel.)
Set PIN
PINs can be set for each device by pressing the Set PIN button in the Devices tab, or
you can skip this step and try to connect to the device first.
Important:
•
The remote device must have authentication enabled, otherwise
the PIN authentication will fail.
Highlight a device, tap on the Set Pin button, and type the PIN.
You will receive a message, either that the PIN has been successfully validated or
that it has been rejected.
If the PIN has been validated, an asterisk (*) appears in the PIN column in the
Devices list box, indicating that this device has a PIN set. Once a PIN is entered, it is
saved in the registry.
To remove the PIN:
•
Choose Set PIN, and press [ENTER].
If the 8525/8530 attempts to connect to a remote device that has Authentication
enabled and does not have a required PIN set, an Authentication Request dialog
box is displayed.
•
Enter the PIN, and tap on OK to connect the devices.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
111
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Server Tab
5.7.2 The Server Tab
Figure 5.41 Bluetooth Servers Tab
The Bluetooth connection is initiated from your 8525/8530 to the remote device –
therefore the 8525/8530 is called the ‘client’ and the remote is called the ‘server’.
The Servers tab displays the server profiles that can be activated in your 8525/8530.
There is currently one server profile available: Serial.
•
Tap on the checkbox to activate the server, and it will display the
associated port name beside the server name.
Once you activate a server profile, it is recommended that the 8525/8530 be
rebooted before you try to bond from a server.
Note:
5.7.2.1
You do not need to reboot if you are deactivating a server.
Outgoing Tab
Figure 5.42 Outgoing Tab
Outgoing Port acts as a serial port that can be used to connect to a list of Bluetooth devices
(one at a time), but you have the freedom to switch on-the-fly.
112 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Active Conn. Tab
The Outgoing Port checkbox allows you to create the Outgoing port. When the port is
created, the Outgoing tab lists the port name.
The Outgoing list dialog box displays a list of services marked as ‘Outgoing’. The *
column indicates the currently selected service. You can tap on Unselect to reset the
current selection, or you can tap on Select to make a selection. The Remove button
deletes the service from the outgoing list.
The Prompt menu determines the behaviour of the pop-up Selection menu.
Choosing Everytime causes the Selection menu to be displayed each time an
outgoing port is created. If you choose Once, the menu is displayed only when a
partner service is not selected.
To display the Selection menu at any time:
• Press [CTRL] [ALT] [F1], and switch the partner Bluetooth device.
If a connection to a partner device already exists, the connection is dropped and
another connection to the newly selected device is created instantly without
disrupting the application that has opened the outgoing port.
Note:
To add a service to the Outgoing port, an active service must first be
deactivated. Then you can choose the ‘Outgoing’ option from the Activation menu (highlight a service, right-click or press the [SPACE] bar to
display the Activation menu).
5.7.3 Active Conn. Tab
Figure 5.43 Bluetooth Active Conn. Tab
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
113
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Properties Tab
The Active Conn. tab lists the Name, Address, and Type of the currently active
connections. The table is periodically updated while on display, but it can take a few
seconds before it reflects the actual list of connections. The Type column of the table
shows ‘ACL’ or ‘SCO’. The Connection list table shows the connections for
scanning as well as the service connections.
Note:
You can change the device-name and description of your radio by clicking
on the System icon in Control Panel, which will open the System Properties dialog box. Click on the Device Name tab to access the menu and
change your settings. Then click on OK.
Although the name will have changed in the Properties menu in Bluetooth
Controls, the radio only reads it on boot-up. For the changes to take effect,
you must reset the 8525/8530.
5.7.4 The Properties Tab
Figure 5.44 Bluetooth Properties Tab
The Properties tab displays information about your 8525/8530, and provides some
port options.
The Device Name field shows the device name of your 8525/8530. This name can
be changed (see the Note in this section for details).
Device Class shows the Class of Device (e.g. desktop), which is always set to
vehicle-mount.
Local Bluetooth Address shows the address of your 8525/8530 radio.
Port Prefix is used to set the port name to either BSP or COM. When the name is
set to BSP, BSP2 to BSP9 are available for activated services (including the server).
When COM is chosen, COM7 to COM9 are available.
114 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
5.7.5 The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
1. To connect to the internet using a GPRS phone equipped with a
Bluetooth radio, begin by setting up the Bluetooth radio. The setup
information is outlined beginning on page 108. Remember to choose
the modem with which you want your 8525/8530 to communicate from
the Scan Device list.
2. To set up the internet parameters, choose the Network And Dial-up
Connections icon from the Control Panel.
Figure 5.45 Network And Dial-up Connection Icon
3. Choose the Make New Connection icon.
Figure 5.46 Creating A GPRS Connection
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
115
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
4. In the Make New Connection dialog box, choose Dial-Up Connection.
Enter a name for your GPRS network connection.ˆ
Figure 5.47 Setting Up The Connection
5. Tap on the Next button to display the Modem dialog box.
Figure 5.48 Setting Up The Modem
6. In the dropdown menu labelled Select a modem:, choose the name of
the modem with which you want to connect, and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box.
116 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
The 8525/8530 communicates with your phone and retrieves the parameters
for the Device Properties dialog box. The 8525/8530 then disconnects.
Figure 5.49 Port Settings
7. Under the Call Options tab, turn off Cancel the call if not connected
within, and press [ENTER] to save your changes.
Figure 5.50 Call Options
8. In the Modem dialog box, choose the Next button to display the Phone
Number dialog box.
Figure 5.51 Setting The Phone Number
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
117
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent. Once you’ve
specified all the necessary information, choose the Finish button.
9. In the Control Panel, choose the Dialing icon.
Figure 5.52 Dialing Icon
10. The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited
according to your network carrier specifications.
Figure 5.53 Setting Up Dialing Properties
Once you’ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements, press [ENTER] to save your changes.
11. At this point, you’ll need to return to the Control Panel and choose the
Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
118 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
The Bluetooth GPRS Phone
12. In the network connection window, the new network configuration – in
this case – GPRS Network – is displayed. Choose the new icon.
Figure 5.54 GPRS Network Connection
This onscreen message indicates the status of your connection – connected,
disconnected, error messages, and so on.
Figure 5.55 Successful Connection
- Choose the Hide button to move this message to the background.
You can now access the internet.
Figure 5.56 Accessing The Internet
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
119
Chapter 5: Configuration
Total Recall
5.8 Total Recall
Total Recall is a Psion Teklogix utility developed to maintain applications and
setting over cold boots. This utility is based on a backup and restore concept and is
extended to incorporate power advanced features.
•
In the Control Panel, choose the Total Recall icon.
Figure 5.57 Total Recall Icon
5.8.1 Creating A Backup Profile
Figure 5.58 Backup Profile
In the dropdown menu, you can choose from four options: Create Backup Profile,
View Selected Profile, Restore Selected Profile and Delete Selected Profile. Keep
in mind however that until a profile is created, the only available option is Create
Backup Profile.
120 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating A Backup Profile
Help Files – BACK And FORWARD Buttons
The BACK and FORWARD buttons allow you to scroll through the help files that
provide steps to guide you through the Total Recall operation.
•
Tap on the Next button to begin the process.
Figure 5.59 Profile Details
Profile Information
Figure 5.60 Profile Options
This dialog box lists the possible storage destinations for the profile file.
•
To begin, type a name for the profile in the field labelled Profile Name.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
121
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating A Backup Profile
The image type – OS Version and Registry Type – for the 8525/8530 is displayed at
the top of the dialog box.
•
Tap on the
icon to expand the settings for Profile Type and
Profile Location.
Figure 5.61 Profile Options
-
•
For this device only – creates a backup that is manually restored by
the operator.
- AutoRestore for this device only – creates a profile that automatically
restores itself following a cold boot.
- AutoRestore for this and other devices – creates a profile that
automatically restores after resuming from a cold boot, but it will not contain
the touchscreen calibration coordinates or the Wireless radio settings.
- Profile Location – allows the operator to specify where the profile is
to be saved. The location for the profile is either \Flash Disk or
\SD-MMC Card.
Tap on the Next button to display the next dialog box – Add Files.
Add Files
Figure 5.62 Adding Files
122 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Creating A Backup Profile
By default, All Files: is selected so that all installed or copied files, database entries,
and the Registry will be saved. You can, however, limit the backup to database,
and/or the registry only.
The backup By Individual File option allows you to select the exact file or files you
want to backup.
The By File Type option allows you to select by predefined file types.
•
Tap on the Next button to view your selections.
Figure 5.63 By File Type
View Selections
Depending on what you have selected for inclusion in your profile, you can view a
list of the selected files, databases and/or registry.
Figure 5.64 Viewing Selections
•
Tap on the Next button to perform the operation.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
123
Chapter 5: Configuration
Restoring A Profile
Performing The Backup
Figure 5.65 Performing The Backup
•
Tap on the Backup button to start the process and create a profile.
5.8.2 Restoring A Profile
To manually restore a profile:
•
•
•
Note:
Tap on the Total Recall icon.
Choose Restore Selected Profile from the dropdown menu.
Choose the Profile Name you want to restore from Profile Name
dropdown menu.
You can also manually restore an auto restore profile located in flash or a
storage device.
5.9 Input Panel
The 8525/8530 is equipped with the framework for a Soft Input Panel (SIP) should
you need to design your own SIP.
Figure 5.66 Input Panel Icon
124 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Input Panel
On the 8530 only, when a keyboard is not connected to the unit, tapping on the
Input icon displays a soft input panel that can be customized using the Input Panel
dialog box. .
Input
Icon
Figure 5.67 Input Icon
Important:
•
If the Input icon is not visible in the taskbar, from the ‘Start’
menu, tap on Settings&gt;Taskbar and Start Menu. Tap the checkbox
next to ‘Show Input Panel Button’. To remove this icon from the
taskbar, tap in the checkbox to delete the check mark.
Tap on the Input Icon in the taskbar to display the soft input panel on the
8530 screen. Keep in mind that the soft keyboard is not displayed when a
physical keyboard is attached to the vehicle-mount.
Soft Keyboard
API And Rx/Tx LEDs
Input Icon
Figure 5.68 Soft Keyboard
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
125
Chapter 5: Configuration
Input Panel
The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than
pressing a key, you tap on letters, numbers, modifier keys, etc. on the 8530 screen.
Note:
Two LEDs – API and Rx/Tx – are available in the taskbar below the soft
keyboard. For information about these LEDs, refer to page 39.
To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard:
•
Tap on the Input Panel icon in the Control Panel.
Figure 5.69 Soft Keyboard Dialog Box
•
Tap on the Options button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard.
Figure 5.70 Soft Keyboard Options
Note:
You can also display this dialog box by double-tapping on the Input icon
in the far-right corner of the taskbar.
Keyboard Size and Type
The options under ‘Keyboard Size’ and ‘Keyboard Type’ allow you to alter the size
of the keyboard keys and to choose the keyboard layout of the soft keyboard.
126 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
IPv6 Support
Keyboard Position
Tapping in the checkbox next to ‘Docked’ locks the soft keyboard in place on the
screen. Leaving this option unchecked allows you to use your stylus to drag the
keyboard around the 8530 screen.
5.10 IPv6 Support
The IPv6 Support icon in the Control Panel allows you to activate IPv6
network support on your unit. This internet protocol specification (version
6) supports 128-bit IP addresses, replacing version 4.
Figure 5.71 IPv6 Support Icon
•
Tap on the icon to display the IPv6 Support dialog box.
Figure 5.72 IPv6 Support Tab
•
Tap on the checkbox next to Enable IPv6 Network Support to enable this
internet protocol.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
127
Chapter 5: Configuration
Scanner Properties Setup
5.11 Scanner Properties Setup
The Teklogix Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you
can tailor bar code options and choose the bar codes your scanner will recognize.
Figure 5.73 Teklogix Scanners Icon
5.11.1 Scanner Barcodes
Figure 5.74 Bar Code Options
The Scanner
The dropdown menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose from one
of the following scanner types used with your vehicle-mount: Non-decoded and
Decoded (external).
The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and
the bar codes it supports.
128 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Non-Decoded Scanners
Important:
To improve the decode speed and performance, enable only those
codes that are required by the application.
External, non-decoded scanners are configured through the Scanner Properties
dialog box.
However, external decoded scanners must be configured by scanning special
configuration bar codes. In these cases, the scanner manufacturer provides
programming manuals for configuration purposes.
• For Symbol decoded scanners, refer to the appropriate programming guide:
• P300, or
• LS3408.
•
For Symbol non-decoded scanners, refer to:
• LS3200 Programming Guide.
•
For Power Scan (PSC) decoded and non-decoded scanners, refer to:
• Powerscan Programing Guide (PSC).
5.11.2 Non-Decoded Scanners
Figure 5.75 Non-Decoded Scanner Parameters
• Tap on the Scanner dropdown menu, and choose Non-decoded.
All the available bar code symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in
this tab.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
129
Chapter 5: Configuration
Non-Decoded Options
A ‘plus’ sign (+) to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub-menu of parameters
is attached.
•
Tap the stylus on the + sign to display the sub-menu.
•
To change a parameter value, double-tap on the parameter. If you need to
type a value, a dialog box is displayed in which you can type a new value.
If you need to change a yes or no value, double-tapping on the parameter
toggles between yes and no.
If you’re using the keyboard:
•
Highlight the bar code you want to work with, and press the [RIGHT]
arrow key to display the sub-menu.
•
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to highlight a parameter.
•
To change a parameter value, press [SPACE] or the [RIGHT] arrow key. If
a field requires text entry, a text box is displayed in which you can enter the
appropriate value.
5.11.2.1 Non-Decoded Options
Dot Time (msec)
The value selected for “Dot Time (msec)” determines (in milliseconds) how long
the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep.
The allowable values are: 0, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0
seconds. A value of 0 (zero) disables the target dot.
Short Code
When enabled (set to ‘ON’), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar
codes (2 characters). When disabled, these short bar codes are rejected.
Enabling “Short Code” may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the
8525/8530 must decode more potential bar codes; it is therefore not recommended
for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters.
130 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 39 Settings
Verify
The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional
decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher
values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code but also improve
the reliability of the decoded bar code.
Security
This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes
(Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for
misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. The default
value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting.
5.11.2.2 Code 39 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 39 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Full Ascii
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the characters +, %, and / are used as
escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character
is converted to an equivalent ASCII character.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
AIAG Strip
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the AIAG data identifier is removed from
each decoded Code 39 label. The data identifier occurs in the first position next to
the Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or a series of
numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identifier defines the
general category or specific use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code.
Note:
If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix TESS application, this
parameter should not be used in conjunction with the TESS AIAG feature.
This is because the 8525/8530 vehicle-mount performs the strip function
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
131
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 39 Settings
before it processes the data through the AIAG feature; if the prefix is
stripped, the data is not identified as AIAG.
Error Accept
If the “Err Accept” and “AIAG Strip” parameters are enabled (set to ‘ON’), all label
data without an AIAG identifier character is accepted. If the “Err Accept” parameter
is disabled and the “AIAG Strip” parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the label data is
not accepted.
Mod Checks
Tapping on this option displays a list of options.
None
If you choose ‘None’, a check is not executed.
Mod 43 Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated.
Mod 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.
Field Size/Chars
Field Size
The field size is the length of the field after the first character is stripped and
the prefix and suffix characters are added. If the field size is non-zero, only
bar codes of that length are passed through.
132 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 128 Settings
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press
the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The
ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.
Suffix Char
Note:
The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character.
For example, if [BKSP] is pressed, the usual action for that key is
performed. If your unit is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI
emulation application, the 8525/8530 transmits the escape sequence
associated with the function immediately after the bar code data.
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the
key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The
ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the
beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note:
For Code 39 bar codes, the “AIAG Strip” is performed before the
“Strip Leading”.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
5.11.2.3 Code 128 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 128 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Include Sym
Setting “Include Sym” to ‘ON’ causes the group separator(s) and start code
contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the screen.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
133
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 13 Settings
Note:
This option is available only when ‘EAN/UCC 128’ is selected.
Variations
When using Code 128, you can choose the variation or type of bar code variation the
scanner will recognize. The options available are Standard, UCC and EAN/UCC.
These options are described below.
Standard
Enable (set to ‘ON’) “Standard” if Code 128 is desired.
UCC 128
“UCC” is a variation of Code 128.
EAN/UCC 128
To successfully scan this type of bar code, “EAN/UCC” must be enabled (set to
‘ON’). “EAN/UCC” bar codes include group separators and start codes.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.4 EAN 13 Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable EAN 13 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Include Country
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the country code is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important:
Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 130) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’).
134 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 13 Settings
An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code.
This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Optional and Required.
Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized
or ignored.
When “Addendum” is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an
addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for
an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the
parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code
without an addendum.
Prefix/Suffix Chars
Prefix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Press
the key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The
ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.
Suffix Char
This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Press the
key you want to insert in the dialog box attached to this parameter. The
ASCII/Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed.
Pressing the [ESC] key in this dialog box resets the data to zero.
Strip Leading
This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the
beginning of the bar code before the prefix character is added.
Note:
The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For
example, if [BKSP] is pressed, the usual action for that key is performed.
If your 8525/8530 is operating with the Psion Teklogix ANSI emulation
application, the vehicle-mount transmits the escape sequence associated
with the function immediately after the bar code data.
Strip Trailing
The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be
removed from the end of the bar code before the suffix character is added.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
135
Chapter 5: Configuration
EAN 8
5.11.2.5 EAN 8
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable EAN 8 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the check digit is included with the decoded
bar code data.
Addendum
Important:
Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 130) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 134.
Prefix/Suffix Chars
See “Prefix/Suffix Chars” on page 135.
5.11.2.6 UPC A Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable UPC A or ‘off’ to disable it.
Include Number Sys
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the number system digit is included with
the decoded bar code data.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit will be included with the
decoded bar code data.
Addendum
Important:
Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 130) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 134.
136 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
UPC E Settings
Prefix/Suffix Chars
See “Prefix/Suffix Chars” on page 135.
5.11.2.7 UPC E Settings
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable UPC E or ‘off’ to disable it.
Convert to UPC-A
Setting this parameter to ‘ON’ results in a non-standard decoding that returns 12
digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code.
Include Number Sys
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the number system digit is included with
the decoded bar code data.
Include Check
When enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code
data.
Addendum
Important:
Before “Addendum” can take effect, the “Short Code” parameter
in the Options menu (see page 130) must be enabled (set to ‘ON’).
Refer to “Addendum” on page 134.
Prefix/Suffix Chars
See “Prefix/Suffix Chars” on page 135.
5.11.2.8 Codabar
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Codabar or ‘off’ to disable it.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
137
Chapter 5: Configuration
Code 93
5.11.2.9 Code 93
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 93 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.10 Code 11
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Code 11 or ‘off’ to disable it.
Include Check
If “Include Chk” is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Check Digits
This parameter can be set to None, One Check Digits or Two Check Digits.
If this parameter set to One Check Digits, it is assumed that the last digit is a
check digit.
If this parameter is set to Two Check Digits, it is assumed that the last two digits
are check digits.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.11 Interleaved 2 of 5
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable Interleaved 2 of 5 or ‘off’ to disable it.
138 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
MSI Plessey
Mod 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This
calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is
calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.12 MSI Plessey
Enabled
Set this parameter to ‘on’ to enable MSI Plessey or ‘off’ to disable it.
One Check Digit
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), it is assumed that the last digit is a
check digit.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.13 Discrete 2 of 5
Mod 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This
calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
139
Chapter 5: Configuration
IATA 2 of 5
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is
calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
5.11.2.14 IATA 2 of 5
Mod 10 Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated.
ITF Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is
calculated.
Include Check
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘ON’), the check digit is included with the
decoded bar code data.
Field Size/Chars
Refer to the description beginning on page 132 for details.
140 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Decoded (External)
5.11.3 Decoded (External)
While you cannot configure the scanner, you can configure communications with a
serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab
5.11.3.1 Tether Port
Figure 5.76 Tether Port Settings
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can
choose an appropriate baud rate.
Figure 5.77 Tether Port Baud Rates
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.
Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose
either 7 or 8 data bits.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
141
Chapter 5: Configuration
Serial Port
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going
through the tether port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in
which you can choose the appropriate Parity.
Figure 5.78 Parity Settings
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5 or 2 – used for
asynchronous communication.
5.11.3.2 Serial Port
Figure 5.79 Serial Port Settings
Enabled
This parameter must be set to on in order for the 8525/8530 to recognize the device
connected to the serial port.
142 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Translations
Baud
Double-tapping on this parameter displays a pop-up window in which you can
choose an appropriate baud rate.
Figure 5.80 Serial Port Baud Rates
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.
Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in which you can choose
either 7 or 8 data bits.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going
through the tether port. Double-tapping on this option displays a pop-up window in
which you can choose the appropriate Parity.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5 or 2 – used for
asynchronous communication.
5.11.4 Translations
Figure 5.81 Translation Tab
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
143
Chapter 5: Configuration
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Setup
•
In the Translation tab, choose the Add button.
Figure 5.82 Modifying A Translation
Input
This value is compared with the decoded bar code reading. If there is a match, the
“Output” string is translated into the decoded bar code.
Output
If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding “Input”
string, the decoded bar code will be translated into the “Output” string. This string
entry parameter can be null, or it may contain any combination of standard and
special characters (e.g., function keys, [ENTER], etc.).
Type
The value chosen from this dropdown menu determines what is compared with
the decoded bar code reading – the beginning of decoded bar code, the end of
decoded bar code, the entire decoded bar code or anywhere within the decoded
bar code (default).
5.12 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Setup
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the protocol used to monitor and
manage devices attached to a TCP/IP network (providing they support SNMP).
SNMP uses Management Information Bases (MIBs) that define the variables an
SNMP Network Management Station can access. Each product has a defined set of
MIBs that determine how SNMP operates, the type of access allowed and so on.
144 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Setup
All Teklogix products support the TEKLOGIX-GENERIC-MIB – a MIB that
defines some common features across Teklogix products. All devices also support
MIB-II, a management information base that defines the common features of
TCP/IP networks. The SNMP Agent software embedded in the 8525/8530 product
supports SNMPv1 (RFC 1157).
• In the Control Panel, choose the SNMP icon.
Figure 5.83 SNMP Icon
The SNMP dialog box is displayed.
Figure 5.84 SNMP Contact Tab
Contact
This field identifies the contact person for this managed node along with
information about how to get in touch with this person. The content of this
parameter is accessible through MIB-II’s sysContact object.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
145
Chapter 5: Configuration
Communities Tab
Location
This parameter is used to identify the physical location of this node (e.g., Warehouse
A: Pillar 32B). The content of this parameter is accessible through MIB-II’s
sysLocation object.
5.12.1 Communities Tab
Figure 5.85 Community Settings
The “Communities” tab provides a means of limiting access to SNMP managed
devices to those SNMP Managers with matching “community names”, as specified
by RFC 1157.
Enable SNMP
Enabling Enable SNMP allows the device to respond to SNMP queries and to send
Traps. After enabling this option and rebooting the device, the SNMP Agent will
automatically start up. To disable this feature, remove the check mark from the
check box.
146 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Adding A Community
5.12.1.1 Adding A Community
•
Choose the Add button to add a new ‘community’.
Figure 5.86 Adding A Community
Name
The value assigned here is the name assigned by the network administrator to the set
of devices to which this managed node belongs.
Rights
This menu allows you to specify access – that is, ‘Read-Only’ or Read-Write’
5.12.1.2 Modifying A Community Setting
To modify an existing community:
•
Highlight the community you want to alter.
•
Choose the Change button.
Figure 5.87 Changing Or Removing A Community
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
147
Chapter 5: Configuration
Removing An Existing Community
A Modify Community dialog box is displayed, listing the community you
highlighted.
•
Edit the Name and/or Rights, and press [ENTER] to save your changes.
5.12.1.3 Removing An Existing Community
To remove an item:
•
Highlight the community you want to remove in the Communities tab and
then choose the Remove button.
A Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.
•
To remove a community, choose the Yes button, or
If you decide not to remove the community, choose the No button.
5.12.2 Trap Destination Tab
A trap is an unsolicited report sent to SNMP Managers by the SNMP Agent running
on the managed node. This option allows you to define where the report will be sent.
Figure 5.88 Trap Destination Tab
5.12.2.1 Enabling Authentication TRAPS
Enabling Enable Authentication TRAPS allows authorization traps to be sent when
a failure is detected (e.g., an SNMP message received with a bad community name).
148 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Adding A Destination
5.12.2.2 Adding A Destination
To add a new destination:
•
Choose the Add button.
Figure 5.89 Adding A Trap Destination
•
Type a destination in the text box provided, and press [ENTER].
5.12.2.3 Changing A Destination
To change an existing trap destination:
•
Highlight the destination you want to alter in the Trap Destination tab, and
then choose the Change button.
A dialog box like the one displayed when you add a destination is displayed.
Figure 5.90 Changing A Destination
•
Make the changes to the destination, and press [ENTER] to save
the changes.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
149
Chapter 5: Configuration
Removing A Trap Destination
5.12.2.4 Removing A Trap Destination
To remove a trap destination:
•
In the Trap Destination tab, highlight the destination you want to delete.
•
Choose the Remove button.
A Delete Confirmation screen is displayed.
•
To remove a destination, choose the Yes button, or
If you decide not to remove the destination, choose the No button.
5.12.3 Permitted Hosts Tab
For security reasons, the Network Administrator may want to restrict SNMP-node
access to a known sub-set of SNMP Managers. This tab lists the IP addresses of all
the SNMP Managers which are allowed to monitor and manage this device. If no
entries are listed, the device will accept SNMP queries from any host.
Figure 5.91 Permitted Hosts Tab
150 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 5: Configuration
Adding A Host
5.12.3.1 Adding A Host
To add a new host:
•
Highlight the Add button, and press [ENTER].
Figure 5.92 Adding A Host
•
Type a new host IP address in the text box provided, and press [ENTER].
5.12.3.2 Changing A Host
To change an existing host IP address:
•
Highlight the IP address you want to alter in the Permitted Hosts tab, and
then choose the Change button.
A dialog box like the one displayed when you add a host is displayed.
•
Make the necessary changes, and press [ENTER].
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
151
TEKTERM APPLICATION
6
6.1 The Tekterm Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2.1.1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.2.2 Macro Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.3 Changing The Screen Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.4 Panning The Screen Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
6.5 The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.6 The Tekterm Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.7 TESS Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
6.7.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.7.3 The Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.7.5 Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6.7.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.7.5.2 [DEL] Key Behaviour In TESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.7.5.3 [BKSP] Key Behaviour In TESS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.7.6 TESS Status Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.7.7 Lock Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.7.8 Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.7.10 The Local Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6.7.12 Queuing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.8 ANSI Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.8.1 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys . . . . . . . 171
6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.8.5 Working With Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.8.5.1 Establishing A New Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
153
6.8.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions . . . . . . 173
6.8.5.3 Closing A Session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.8.5.4 Printing A Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.8.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.9 The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
6.10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.11 Working With Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus . . . . . . . . 178
6.11.1.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.11.1.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
6.11.1.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.11.1.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.11.1.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus. . . . . . . . . . 179
6.11.2.1 Sub-Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.11.2.2 Numeric Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.11.2.3 Y/N Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.11.2.4 Alpha Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6.11.2.5 String Entry Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.12 Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.13 The Parameters Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
6.13.1 Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.14 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
6.15 More Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
6.16 Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
6.17 System Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.17.1 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.17.1.1 Macro Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
6.17.1.2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.17.1.3 Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.17.1.4 Keyboard Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
6.17.2 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
6.17.4 User Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.17.5 Auto Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.18 Scanner Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
6.19 View Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
154 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
6.19.1 Split Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.19.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
6.19.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.19.1.3 Toggling Between Full &amp; Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.19.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.19.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
6.19.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window . . . . . . . . . 198
6.20 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
6.20.1 ANSI Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
6.20.1.1 Host Conn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
6.20.1.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6.20.1.3 Xmit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
6.20.1.4 Kbd Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
6.20.1.5 Edit Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
6.20.1.6 Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
6.20.1.7 Host Char Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6.20.1.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6.20.2 TESS Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6.20.2.1 Host Conn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.20.2.2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.20.2.3 Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.20.2.4 Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
6.20.2.5 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
6.20.2.6 Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
6.20.2.7 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
6.20.2.8 Anchor View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
6.20.2.9 Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
6.20.3 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.20.4 Radio Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
6.21 Ports– Tether And Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . 242
6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 245
6.21.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport. . . . . . . . 245
6.21.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.22 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
6.22.2 802.IQ v2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
155
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Tekterm Application
6.1 The Tekterm Application
Tekterm is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data
transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers. The 8525/8530
includes unique features that support Tekterm – a Psion Teklogix application that
has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host
computers.
6.2 Additional Keyboard Functions
In addition to the standard keyboard functions (see “The Keyboard” on page 34),
Tekterm supports function keys, softkeys and macro keys.
6.2.1 Function Keys And Softkeys
6.2.1.1 Function Keys
The 8525/8530 is equipped with a series of function keys each of which is defined in
the application software.
Accessing Function Keys [F1] to [F10]
Function keys [F1] to [F10] can be directly accessed by pressing the function keys
labelled in yellow along the top of the keyboard. No key combination is required.
Accessing Function Keys [F11] To [F20]
These keys are labelled in orange in the top-left corner of the function keys. To
access these keys, press the [ORANGE] key followed by [F1] to [F10].
•
To access function key [F11], press the [ORANGE] key followed
by [F1].
•
Press [ORANGE] [F2] to access function key [F12], and so on.
Accessing Function Keys [F21] To [F30]
These keys are labelled in blue in the top-right corner of the function keys. To access
these keys, press the [BLUE] key followed by [F1] to [F10].
•
To access function key [F21], press the [BLUE] key followed by [F1].
•
Press [BLUE] [F2] to access Function key [F22], and so on.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
157
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Softkey Function Keys
6.2.1.2 Softkey Function Keys
To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function
keys [F1] to [F5] have been programmed to perform specific actions in the Tekterm
menus. Table 6.1 describes these function keys.
These softkeys can be reprogrammed to perform different functions within TESS
and ANSI applications.
Important:
Tapping the stylus on the appropriate softkey label executes the
function of the softkey providing that the labels are visible at the
bottom of the 8525/8530 screen. See “Softkeys” on page 189 if
they are not visible.
Function Key
Softkey Function
[F1]
NEXT – Displays the next sub-menu
[F2]
PREV – Displays the previous menu.
[F3]
DEFLT – Restores parameters to default settings –
even after pressing [F4] to save the changes.
[F4]
SAVE – Saves a change to a parameter value.
[F5]
LITRL – Literal mode allows special characters to be
entered in a string parameter such as macro key strings.
Table 6.1 Softkeys
Note:
The SAVE onscreen label only appears when a parameter value has
been changed and has not yet been saved.
6.2.2 Macro Keys
Important:
Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 82 for details about
creating macros.
8525/8530 vehicle-mounts are equipped with a twelve macro keys that can be
programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of
executable keys like the [ENTER] key, the [BKSP] key, any function key and arrow
key, and so on.
158 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Changing The Screen Font Size
Macro Keys [M1] To [M12]
These keys are displayed in blue print across the top row of alpha keys and the first
two alpha keys in the second row on the keyboard.
To access a macro key, press the [BLUE] key followed by the appropriate alpha key.
For example, on a Qwerty keyboard:
•
Press [BLUE] [Q] to access macro key [M1].
•
To access [M2], press [BLUE] [W], and so on.
6.3 Changing The Screen Font Size
To cycle through the available screen fonts:
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT] [F].
6.4 Panning The Screen Contents
If the content of a screen is too large to fit in the margins of the 8525/8530 display,
the content can be panned or shifted to bring the information outside the margins
into view. Normally, the Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the
direction of the arrow pressed. However, if you lock the [BLUE] key ‘on’, you can
pan the entire contents of the screen.
Panning relies on the values set in the “Use Increment”, “X Increment” and
“Y Increment” parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows
(lines) the screen contents shift.
•
In the “More Parameters” menu, position the cursor on “View Manager”
and press [F1].
•
First, enable the “Use Increment” parameter – set it to “Y”.
“X Increment” determines the number of columns (spaces) the screen pans when the
[BLUE] key is locked ‘on’ and the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] arrow key is pressed.
“Y Increment” determines the number of rows (lines) the screen pans when the [UP]
or [DOWN] arrow key is pressed when the [BLUE] key is locked ‘on.
•
Assign a value to the “X Increment” and “Y Increment” parameters.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
159
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications
To pan the screen contents:
•
Press the [BLUE] key twice to lock it ‘on’. It will be displayed in uppercase
letters – BLUE – in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
•
Press the [RIGHT], [LEFT], [UP] or [DOWN] arrow key.
Note:
Pressing the [LEFT] arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing the
[RIGHT] arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on.
Once you’re done:
•
Press the [BLUE] key a third time to unlock or turn it off.
6.5 The Task Manager–Switching Between Applications
To display the Task Manager screen:
•
In the Start Menu, tap on the Shortcuts menu followed by Task Manager.
Figure 6.1 Task Manager Screen
Note:
A shortcut – to bypass the Start Menu and go directly to the
‘Task Manager’ screen, press [ALT] [ESC].
To switch between applications:
•
Highlight the application with which you want to work.
•
Tap on the Switch To button.
To end or close an application:
•
Highlight the application you want to end, and tap on the End Task button.
160 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Tekterm Status Area
6.6 The Tekterm Status Area
Tekterm provides a status area just above the softkey labels. The status area
indicates the operating condition of the vehicle-mount.
Figure 6.2 Status Area
In the sample screen above, the security level assigned within the Tekterm
application is displayed in the status area. One of the following levels can be
displayed – Supervisor or Teklogix.
6.7 TESS Emulation
TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Psion Teklogix
computers. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or
a Psion Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) and installed in the host
converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9150 Access Point is also equipped
with protocol emulation software.
Note:
If the message “RESET: Press Enter” flashes at the bottom of the TESS
screen when you turn on the 8525/8530, press the [ENTER] key once.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
161
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Configuration
6.7.1 Configuration
Note:
Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. The title
you assign will be displayed in the Display Menu.
The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is
described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 200.
A unique number must be assigned in the “Terminal #” parameter for each TESS
session. Refer to “Terminal #” in the section titled “TESS Settings” on page 218
for details.
6.7.2 Working With Multiple Sessions
To display another session in TESS:
•
Go to the startup ‘Display Menu’. If you are in a TESS session, press
[CTRL][ALT][0] to go to the ‘Display Menu’.
•
Type the letter corresponding to the application you want to launch.
For example, suppose the sessions are listed in the “Display Menu” as
‘D TESS1’ and ‘E TESS2’. To launch the session named TESS2, type
the letter e.
6.7.3 The Field Types
Fixed Field – displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard.
Entry Field – allows the operator to enter data. This type of field is usually shown
as: “........”
Match Field – the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If
the entered data does not match the expected format, the unit emits a long beep.
Auto-tab Field – automatically moves the cursor to the next field when the current
field is filled.
Bar code only Field – is filled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries
are not accepted in this type of field.
Serial I/O Field – is filled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is
not accepted in this type of field.
6.7.4 IBM 5250 Emulation Keys
The following keys allow the Psion Teklogix computer to better emulate the
functions of a true IBM 5250 terminal.
162 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Data Entry
Note:
These keys are active at all times in TESS applications.
Key Sequence
[PgDn] key
[PgUp] key
[End] key
[Home] key
Cursor Movement
Cursor moves to the first position in the next
input field. If already in the last field, the cursor
moves to the first input field on the screen.
Cursor moves to the beginning of the current
field. If already in the first position, the cursor
moves to beginning of the previous field.
Current field is cleared from the cursor position
to the end of the field, and the cursor moves to
the next input field.
Cursor moves to the first input field on the
screen.
6.7.5 Data Entry
The 8525/8530 accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a
transmission to the host computer. The following actions cause the 8525/8530
to transmit:
•
Pressing a function key or the [ENTER] key (which is considered to be
[F0]) causes the 8525 to transmit.
•
Completing data entry into a “transmit on entry” field also causes the
8525 to transmit.
There are several ways to configure the 8525/8530 vehicle-mount to complete a data field:
•
Pressing [ENTER] after entering data.
•
Pressing a function key after entering data.
•
Pressing an arrow key after entering data.
•
Filling an auto-tab field.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
163
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement
6.7.5.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement
The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described
in the table below.
Field mode
Press [CTRL] f to enter field mode. In this mode, once data
entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be
changed without retyping the entire field.
In field mode, the [RIGHT] and [LEFT] arrow keys do not
perform any functions. Pressing the [UP] or [DOWN] arrow
key completes the entry field and then, moves the cursor to the
previous or next field.
Fcursor mode
Press [CTRL] u to enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data
entry into a field has been completed, the entry cannot be
changed without retyping the entire field.
In fcursor mode, the [UP], [DOWN], [LEFT] and [RIGHT]
arrow keys move the cursor between fields.
Insert mode
Press [CTRL] i to enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be
entered between two characters that have been previously
entered.
In insert mode, the [RIGHT] and [LEFT] arrow keys move the
cursor right and left within a field. The [UP] and [DOWN]
arrow keys complete the entry field and move the cursor to the
previous or next field.
Replace mode
Press [CTRL] r to enter replace mode. In this mode, data can
be entered over previously entered characters.
In replace mode, the [RIGHT] and [LEFT] arrow keys move
the cursor to the right and left within a field. The [UP] and
[DOWN] arrow keys complete the entry field and move the
cursor to the previous or next field.
Note:
When the “Enter on Arr” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the [UP] and
[DOWN] arrow keys do not complete an entry field. Refer to page 230 for
details about this parameter.
164 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
[DEL] Key Behaviour In TESS
6.7.5.2 [DEL] Key Behaviour In TESS
Field
mode
• In a left justified field, the [DEL] key erases all characters in the field
and places the cursor in the left most position of that field.
• In a right justified field, the [DEL] key erases all characters in the field
and places the cursor in the right most position of that field.
• If the [DEL] key is used to clear data in a field that has been pre-filled by
the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the updated
information is sent to the host in the next response message.
Replace
mode
• In both left and right justified fields, the [DEL] key erases characters
beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the field. The
cursor remains in the same position in the field.
• If the [DEL] key is pressed while cursor is in the right most
position in the field, the unit emits a keyboard error beep.
• If the [DEL] key is used to clear data in a field that has been
pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the
updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.
Insert
mode
• In both left and right justified fields, the [DEL] key erases the characters
from one character position to right of the cursor to
the end of the field.
• If the [DEL] key is pressed while the cursor is in the right most position
in the field, the unit emits a keyboard error beep.
• If the [DEL] key is used to clear data in a field that has been
pre-filled by the host application, the field is flagged as modified and the
updated information is sent to the host in the next response message.
Fcursor
mode
• Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The [DEL] key operates in the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it does in “Field mode”.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
165
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
[BKSP] Key Behaviour In TESS
6.7.5.3 [BKSP] Key Behaviour In TESS
Field
mode
• In a left justified field, the [BKSP] key erases the character directly
to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor one position to the
left. When the last character in the field is deleted, the field displays
the value that it contained before it was modified, and the field is
opened.
• In a right justified field, the [BKSP] key erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to
the right by one position. When the last character in the field is
deleted, the field displays the value that it contained before it was
modified, and the field is opened.
• If the [BKSP] key is pressed when the field is empty, the unit emits a
keyboard error beep.
• The [BKSP] key does not delete data pre-filled by the host application.
• If the [BKSP] key is pressed in a field that has not been modified,
the 8525/8530 emits a keyboard error beep.
• If data is entered into a field and is then deleted before the field is
completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the
field or when the screen is transmitted.
Replace
mode
• In a left justified field, the [BKSP] key erases the character on which
the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last
character in the string; in this case, the [BKSP] key erases the character to the left of the cursor.
• In a right justified field, the [BKSP] key erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then
shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right
by one position.
• If the [BKSP] key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most
character position of the field, the cursor does not shift to the left
when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in
the field.
• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty –
that is, any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the [BKSP] key
in the empty field results in a keyboard error beep.
• The [BKSP] key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.
• If data is entered in a field and is then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field
or when the screen is transmitted.
166 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
TESS Status Message
Insert
mode
• In a left justified field, the [BKSP] function erases the character on
which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the
character string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the
cursor. When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains
empty, and any further [BKSP] functions in the empty field result in
a keyboard error beep.
• In a right justified field, the [BKSP] function erases the character
that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to
the right one position.
• If the [BKSP] key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most
character position of that field, the cursor does not shift to the left
when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position
in the field.
• When the last character in a field is erased, the field remains empty –
i.e. any pre-filled data is not displayed. Pressing the BKSP key in the
empty field sounds a keyboard error beep.
• The [BKSP] key can delete data pre-filled by the host application.
• If data is entered into a field and then deleted before the field is completed, the field remains unmodified when the cursor leaves the field
or when the screen is transmitted.
Fcursor
mode
• Refer to “Field Mode” at the beginning of this table. The [BKSP]
key operates in exactly the same manner in “Fcursor mode” as it
does in “Field mode”.
6.7.6 TESS Status Message
•
Press [CTRL] [S] to continuously display the status message in the lower
left corner of the screen.
•
Press [CTRL] [S] again if you want the status message to appear only during
transmit (lock-H). The message should look similar to the sample below:
V6.0 fld 0.6
“V6.0” is the TESS version number. “fld” indicates that TESS is currently in field
mode. Insert and replace mode are represented as “ins” and “rep” respectively. The
number “0.6” indicates the response time of the last transmission in seconds. Press
[CTRL] [T] to display the unit number instead of the TESS version number.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
167
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Lock Messages
6.7.7 Lock Messages
When information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to
prevent further data entry until the 8525/8530 receives a reply. A locked state is
indicated by either “LOCK-B” (base) or “LOCK-H” (host) in the lower left
corner of the display.
When the reply is received by the 8525/8530, the lock message disappears and the
keyboard can be used again.
6.7.8 Control Commands
A group of [CTRL] key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the
8525/8530 will operate under a variety of conditions.
•
[CTRL] [P] – Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key
combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not
previously received at the 8525/8530 vehicle-mount.
•
[CTRL] [S] – Displays the 8525/8530 status continuously. Below is a
sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your screen:
Lock-B/Lock-H
•
enh
“application name”
[CTRL][T] – Displays the 8525/8530 status with the terminal number
instead of the name.
Lock-B/Lock-H
•
fld
rep
“terminal nn”
[CTRL] [H] – Displays a menu of available hosts.
6.7.9 Resetting A TESS Session
Resetting a TESS session requires that [CTRL] C be pressed three times within a
two second period to generate the “RESET – User request” message.
•
Press and hold down the [CTRL] key, and press the [C] key three times
within a two second period.
•
Press [ENTER].
This procedure restarts the TESS session without affecting the rest of the
8525/8530.
168 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Local Menu
6.7.10 The Local Menu
The host can store local procedures in the 8525/8530 for use when the unit is offline. A menu of these procedures appears whenever [CTRL] [L] is pressed
(see Figure 6.3).
• Press the function key corresponding to the procedure you want to perform.
Local procedures will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing”
parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 225
and “Queuing” on page 225).
Although using local procedures eliminates the advantages of an on-line 8525/8530,
it allows work to continue when the host is unavailable. The “LOCK-B/H”
messages are replaced with “NEXT-B/H” in this mode.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
LOCAL MENU
- Select Host
Figure 6.3 Local Menu
6.7.11 Selecting Another Host Computer
•
Press [CTRL] [H] or [F9] from the local menu to display a menu of
available hosts.
This menu appears only when more than one host is available.
Select Host: ......
F1 - Host 1 F2 - Host 2
Figure 6.4 Select Host Screen
Note:
This feature will not function when the “Lcl Process” and “Queuing”
parameters are disabled (see “Lcl Process – Save on Reset” on page 225 and
“Queuing” on page 225).
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
169
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Queuing Mode
6.7.12 Queuing Mode
In some applications, queuing mode can decrease the computer lock time. In queuing
mode, the host computer may send several pages to an 8525/8530 without waiting for
a response. These pages are stored in a queue within the vehicle-mount. The
operator completes the entries on the first page and then, presses a function key.
The 8525/8530 simultaneously transmits to the host and displays the next page in
the queue. The computer does not lock, allowing the operator to enter data on the
next page immediately. This continues as long as there are pages in the queue.
Queuing mode is used for repetitive tasks, and the queued screens look identical.
The 8525/8530 displays a “Next” message indicating that a new page is on the
display. “Next” messages also contain information about radio communications:
“NEXT-B” indicates that the unit has data to transmit to the base station. “NEXT-H”
indicates that the base station has acknowledged a transmission. Unlike lock
messages, “Next” messages do not lock the keyboard. Keying is allowed while
“Next” messages are displayed.
While queuing mode may improve apparent response time, it can present difficulties
to hosts that are operating in real time. It should only be used after careful
consideration of the host environment. The 8525/8530 must be configured for
queuing mode (see the “Queuing” parameter on page 225). Additional information
on queuing can be found in the TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) Manual.
6.8 ANSI Emulation
The Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals.
This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes.
6.8.1 Configuration
To configure the 8525/8530 for ANSI mode, the “Name” and “Type” of session – in
this case, ANSI – must be specified in the Applications menu. This menu is
described in the section titled, “Applications” on page 200.
Next, a unique number must be assigned using the “Terminal #” parameter. This
number should be unique across the entire system – that is, each 8525/8530 and
each application session in each 8525/8530 across your system must have a unique
number assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled “ANSI Settings”
on page 201.
Once the 8525/8530 is configured, an ANSI operation can be selected from the
startup “Display Menu”.
170 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Sending Data To The Host
6.8.2 Sending Data To The Host
8525/8530 vehicle-mounts running ANSI sessions transmit characters to the host as
soon as they are typed. The 8525/8530 provides parameters that determine when the
computer transmits characters to the host.
The 8525/8530 can be configured to transmit after a number of characters are typed
in (the “Xmit Count” parameter) or after some time has elapsed (the “Xmit Wait”
parameter), or both. This reduces overhead on the radio link and improves response
time. See page 209 for more information about these parameters.
You can also determine whether the 8525/8530 transmits immediately after the
[ENTER] key, an arrow key, or a function key is pressed.
The 8525/8530 computer also responds immediately to the device attribute requests
“CSIc”, “CSI0c” and “ESCZ”.
Note:
For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI,
refer to “ANSI Settings” on page 201.
6.8.3 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys
The Psion Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 6.2 maps the
equivalent VT220 keys.
Psion Teklogix Key
Equivalent VT220 Key
[UP] arrow
Up arrow
[DOWN] arrow
Down arrow
[RIGHT] arrow
Right arrow
[LEFT] arrow
Left arrow
[F1]-[F4]
PF1-PF4
[F5]
None
[F6]-[F10]
F6-F10
[F11]
F11 (ESC)
[F12]
F12 (BS)
[F13]
F13 (LF)
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
171
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Block Mode (Local Editing)
Psion Teklogix Key
Equivalent VT220 Key
[F14]
F14
[F15]
Help
[F16]
Do
[F17]-[F20]
F17-F20
[F21]
Find
[F22]
Insert Here
[F23]
Remove
[F24]
Select
[F25]
Previous Screen
[F26]
Next Screen
[F27]-[F36]
None
Table 6.2 Psion Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys
6.8.4 Block Mode (Local Editing)
The Psion Teklogix 8525/8530s support “block mode” (or Local Editing).
Application programs must be specifically written to support this mode. For
software that supports this mode, the keys shown in Table 6.3 have special meaning.
Key
Function
[ENTER]
Starts transmission of data.
Function keys
Start transmission of data.
Arrow keys
Move cursor to the next unprotected position in the
appropriate direction.
[SHIFT] [RIGHT] arrow
Moves the cursor to the next unprotected area.
[SHIFT] [LEFT] arrow
Moves the cursor to the previous unprotected area.
172 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Working With Sessions
Key
Function
[DEL]
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor, and
moves cursor one position to the left.
[CLR]
Erases the data in an area and moves the cursor to
the first position in the area.
Table 6.3 Function Of Keys In Block Mode
6.8.5 Working With Sessions
Important:
Use only lowercase letters when entering commands
at the “TCP &gt;” prompt.
6.8.5.1 Establishing A New Session
•
Press [CTRL], and type a lowercase a.
At the TCP&gt; prompt:
•
•
•
Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address.
Press [ENTER].
Log in as usual to begin working with the new session.
6.8.5.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions
To list the current sessions:
•
Press [CTRL], and type a lowercase a.
At the TCP&gt; prompt:
•
Type sess in lowercase letters, and press [ENTER].
To move to another session:
•
•
At the TCP&gt; prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session
number to which you want to move.
e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2.
Press [ENTER].
6.8.5.3 Closing A Session
To close a session:
• Press [CTRL], and type a lowercase a.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
173
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Printing A Screen
•
•
At the TCP&gt; prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session
number you want to close.
e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2.
Press [ENTER].
6.8.5.4 Printing A Screen
To print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line:
• Press [CTRL], and type p.
The screen will be printed using the port configured as “Print”.
6.8.5.5 Smart Echo – Disabling
In some circumstances – like entering a password – you many want to temporarily
disable “smart echo”, disguising the characters you type with ‘.’ (periods).
• Press [CTRL] [ALT] [P], and type a ‘.’ (period).
• Type the necessary information using the keyboard, and then press
[ENTER] to return to “smart echo mode.
6.9 The Radio Statistics Screen
To access the radios statistics screen, you’ll need to use the ‘Applications’ menu to
assign a radio title:
• In the ‘More Parameters’ menu, choose ‘Applications’.
• In the ‘Type’ field, choose RadioStats.
• In the ‘Title’ field, type a name for the radio screen – e.g., Radio.
• Press [F4] to save your changes, and then reset the 8525/8530 – press and
hold down the [BLUE] and [ENTER] keys for a minimum of 6 seconds.
• In the ‘Display’ menu, type the letter corresponding to the radio statistics
screen. For example, in the sample screen below, you’d type d to display the
radio statistics screen.
01
A
B
C
D
Display Menu
Parameters
TESS
ANSI
Radio
174 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
802.IQ Stats Screen
6.9.1 802.IQ Stats Screen
802.IQ Stats
AP/Controller MAC 00:00:00:00
Terminal MAC 00:00:00:00:00:00
bootnum: C33B
rm
12 xm
7
rb
50 xi
1
ra
7 xa
12
bt
0 xr
1
rt (avg/lst)
10000:
0
fr:00 ar:00
fh:00 ah:00
ca:0 tn:0 sts:0
typ:0 msk:0 Q:0
AcQ:1 TxQ:1
-----Address Info------------Radio Address 0
End of statistics.
•
AP/Controller macMAC address of the Teklogix access point/controller with
which this 8525/8530 is currently associated.
•
Terminal MAC MAC address of the 8525/8530 vehicle-mount computer.
•
bootnum
e.g., C33B – the boot number of the network controller.
This number increments each time the controller reboots
so that 8525/8530s can detect the reboot when they reinitialize.
•
rm
number of unique received messages.
•
xm
number of unique transmitted messages.
•
rb
number of received beacons. This number should continuously increment.
•
xi
number of initializations with the network controller.
•
ra
number of received acknowledgements. (Normally, this
number should match the value in xm.)
•
xa
number of transmitted acknowledgements. (Normally,
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
175
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen
this number should match the value in rm.)
•
bt
beacon timeouts. Number of times the beacon has not
been received as expected.
•
xr
number of retransmissions. This number should remain
low if radio coverage is adequate.
•
rt
average round trip time. This number represents the milliseconds taken to send a message and receive a response
from the base station.
Cellular Protocol message numbers:
•
fr
forward remote number (hex).
•
ar
acknowledged remote number (hex).
•
fh
forward host number (hex).
•
ah
acknowledged host number (hex).
•
ca
radio address. This is the Cellular Address, including
session number (hex).
•
tn
host terminal number of session (decimal).
•
sts
session status (hex).
•
typ
data stream type (hex).
•
msk
message mask (hex).
•
Q
memory address of first message in receive queue (i.e. if
0 then the receive queue is empty).
•
AcQ
number of messages that have been sent but not yet
acknowledged by the Cellular Master (decimal).
•
TxQ
number of messages waiting to be sent (decimal).
6.9.2 Exiting The Radio Statistics Screen
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT] [0] (zero) to return to the ‘Display’ menu.
176 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
The Tekterm Startup Display Menu
6.10 The Tekterm Startup Display Menu
The values assigned to Tekterm parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize
communication at the site in which an 8525/8530 is operating. While some
parameters are accessible through the “Parameter Manager”, others can be adjusted
through the Windows CE .NET Control Panel. This section provides a description
of all parameters and how to adjust them.
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT] [0] (zero) to work with the ‘Display’ menu.
From this startup menu, you can launch the “Parameters” menu along with TESS
and/or ANSI sessions. You can also display the Radio Statistics screen.
01
A
B
C
Note:
Display Menu
Parameters
TESS
ANSI
Aside from the ‘Parameters’ menu, all other applications listed in the ‘Display Menu’ are created in the ‘Applications’ menu. Refer to “Applications”
on page 200 for details.
To launch an application, either type the letter to the left of the application you want
to use, or tap the stylus on the item.
For example, to display the “Parameters” menu:
•
Type the letter a, or
•
Tap the stylus on the “Parameters” item.
Note:
To return to the ‘Display Menu’, press [F2] – the ‘Previous’ key.
6.11 Working With Menus
The 8525/8530 offers two ways to navigate menus and choose values – you can
either use the keyboard or, you can select items by tapping a stylus on the screen.
There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. Some
menus have sub-menus attached to them and others utilize a Control Panel dialog
box to make adjustments.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
177
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus
Important:
Depending on the method you use when working with menus,
review either “Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through
Menus” on page 178 or “Using The Keyboard To Navigate
Through Menus” on page 179.
6.11.1 Using The Touchscreen To Navigate Through Menus
6.11.1.1 Sub-Menus
The “&raquo;” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has
a sub-menu.
Displaying Sub-Menus
To display a sub-menu:
•
Double-tap the stylus on the menu item with the sub-menu you want
to display.
Returning To The Previous Menu
•
If the softkey labels are visible at the bottom of the screen, tap the stylus on
the “PREV” (previous) softkey label.
•
If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press [F2] – the “PREV”
function key.
6.11.1.2 Numeric Parameters
Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video.
•
To decrease the numeric value, tap the stylus on the left side of the number.
•
To increase the numeric value, tap the stylus on the right side of the
number.
Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example,
a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either
exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value
for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.
178 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Y/N Parameters
6.11.1.3 Y/N Parameters
Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable
a Y/N parameter:
•
Tap the stylus on the parameter associated with the Y/N value – the value
will toggle between “Y” and “N”.
Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right
arrow (&raquo;) appears next to the “Y” or “N”.
•
Tap the stylus on the sub-menu arrow (&raquo;) to display the sub-menu.
6.11.1.4 Alpha Parameters
Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable
values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters
or words. To cycle through the set:
•
Tap the stylus on the alpha field to cycle through the options.
6.11.1.5 String Entry Parameters
You’ll need to use the keyboard to enter values in string entry fields. Refer to “String
Entry Parameters” on page 181 for details.
6.11.2 Using The Keyboard To Navigate Through Menus
•
Press the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to move the cursor up and down
the current menu.
The currently selected parameter name will be displayed in reverse video.
6.11.2.1 Sub-Menus
The “&raquo;” character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has
a sub-menu.
Displaying Sub-Menus
To display a sub-menu:
•
Use the [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys to position the cursor on the
menu item with the sub-menu you want to display.
•
Press [F1] – the “NEXT” menu function key.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
179
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Numeric Parameters
Returning To The Previous Menu
•
Press [F2] – the “PREV” function key, or
•
Press [ESC].
6.11.2.2 Numeric Parameters
Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement
a number:
•
Press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow keys, or
•
Type the desired number in the field. Negative values are entered by typing
a “-” (minus) sign and then the number.
•
Press [ENTER].
Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it – for example,
a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either
exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected – the original value
for this parameter, if any, will be displayed.
6.11.2.3 Y/N Parameters
Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable
a Y/N parameter:
•
Press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key once, or
•
Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter.
Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right
arrow (&raquo;) appears next to the “Y” or “N”.
6.11.2.4 Alpha Parameters
Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable
values for alpha parameters consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or
words. To cycle through the set:
•
Press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow keys.
180 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
String Entry Parameters
6.11.2.5 String Entry Parameters
Important:
For detailed information about using string entry fields to
program macro keys, refer to “Macro Control Panel” on
page 188.
A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a
string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty fields
are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter
information in string entry parameters are described in this section.
In string entry parameters, the [UP] arrow, [DOWN] arrow, [ENTER] and [BKSP]
keys have the following functions:
•
The [UP] and [DOWN] arrow keys move the cursor between entry fields in
the direction of the arrow.
•
[ENTER] completes the entry field.
•
[BKSP] deletes the character to the left of the cursor.
•
[DEL] (key combination [BLUE] [BKSP]) clears the entire field.
Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys
Important:
Make sure the [CTRL] and [SHIFT] keys are turned off!
By pressing either the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key, you can cycle through
a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard.
•
Press the [RIGHT] arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and
the [LEFT] arrow to display the previous one.
Adding Additional ASCII Characters
When you’ve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same
field, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally,
pressing the [RIGHT] arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry
field, pressing the [RIGHT] arrow key cycles through the available ASCII
characters instead. If you’ve already chosen an ASCII character and want to
add another one in the field, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor
to the right.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
181
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Saving Changes To Parameters
To add another ASCII character in the string entry field, next to the one you’ve
already chosen:
•
Type a numeric character – for example, type the number 7.
•
Next, press the [BKSP] key.
The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character.
•
Press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to scroll through the ASCII
characters, and select another character.
Entering Information In A String Entry Field
In addition to using the fixed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter,
you can also type text in a string entry field.
•
Type the required text in the string entry field – including letters, numbers
and symbols.
•
Press [ENTER] to save the text.
Entering Unicode Values
Unicode is a trademark of The Unicode Consortium. To enter a Unicode™ value for
one-time use:
•
Press and hold down the [ALT] key while typing a four digit decimal value
that represents the Unicode™ character you want to display.
•
Release the [ALT] key.
Important:
If you have a set of Unicode™ values that you use frequently, you
may want to create and save them in a pop-up window so that you
can access them whenever necessary. Refer to “Custom Characters (Unicode™)” on page 197 for details.
6.11.3 Saving Changes To Parameters
Whenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this:
•
Press [F4] – the “SAVE” key, or
•
Tap the stylus on the “SAVE” softkey label.
Note:
If the softkey labels are not visible, you’ll have to press [F4] – the “SAVE”
function key.
182 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Retrieving Default Parameter Values
If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a
dialog box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes.
6.11.4 Retrieving Default Parameter Values
Important:
When [F3] – the DEFAULT key – is pressed, all parameter values
revert to the factory defaults, including those values that you’ve
changed and saved.
•
Press [F3] – the “DEFAULT” function key, or tap the stylus on the
“DEFAULT” softkey label – to reinstate the default parameter values.
•
Press [F4] – the “SAVE” function key, or tap the stylus on the “SAVE”
softkey label – to save the changes.
•
Reset the 8525/8530. See &quot;Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount&quot; in the
next section.
6.12 Resetting The 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount
Some parameter adjustments require that the 8525/8530 be reset before the changes
can take effect. To reset the unit:
•
Press and hold down the [BLUE] key and the [ENTER/ON] key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
A reset results in a complete reboot of the unit. All RAM memory contents are lost.
The contents of the flash memory and memory card are preserved. When the
8525/8530 is reset, the screen displays the Psion Teklogix and Microsoft&reg;
Windows&reg; CE .NET splash screen before displaying the startup desktop.
6.13 The Parameters Menu
•
At the ‘Display’ menu, type a to display the Parameters menu.
01
Parameters
More Parameters
Security
Display
&raquo;
User
&raquo;
Range
see page 185
see page 184
see page 184
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
183
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Security Settings
The “Parameters” menu allows you to adjust the screen contrast and select a security
level. With a Supervisory or Teklogix password, you can also access the parameters
listed in the “More Parameters” sub-menu.
6.13.1 Security Settings
To access the “More Parameters” sub-menus, the “Security” parameter must be set to
either a Supervisor or a Teklogix level password. The default security level is User.
01
Parameters
Range
More Parameters &raquo;
see page 185
Security
see text
Display
&raquo;
see text
•
Tap on the Security parameter to display the Security Level dialog box.
Refer to “Security Levels” on page 59 for details about setting the security level for
your 8525/8530.
6.14 Display Options
The ‘Display’ sub-menu is used to adjust your unit’s display properties.
•
Press [F1] to access the ‘Display’ sub-menu.
02
Display
Backlight Ctrl Panel &raquo;
Range
see text
The Display Properties dialog box is displayed where you can adjust the
appearance, backlight and contrast of your 8525/8530 display.
Important:
The &quot;Display Properties&quot; dialog box options are described in
detail beginning on page 76.
184 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
More Parameters
Figure 6.5 Display Properties
6.15 More Parameters
The “More Parameters” sub-menus contain the Tekterm parameters and can only be
accessed with the proper security password – either a Supervisory or a Teklogix
password. (Refer to “Security Settings” on page 184 for details.)
Warning:
•
Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of
how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase
response time or cause communication difficulties. Generally,
parameters are configured for each site during installation.
At the startup ‘Display’ menu, type ‘a’ to display the ‘Parameters’ menu.
01
Parameters
More Parameters
Security
Display
•
&raquo;
Supervisor
&raquo;
Range
see page 185
see page 184
see page 184
To open the ‘More Parameters’ menu, press [F1].
02
Parameters
Radio
System
Scanner Ctrl Panel
View Manager
Applications
Ports
Network
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
185
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Radio Parameters
6.16 Radio Parameters
Important:
Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory
settings without a clear understanding of your system.
The 8525/8530 is equipped with an 802.11b radio.
•
Press [F1] to display the ‘Radio’ sub-menu.
03
Radio
802.11
&raquo;
•
Press [F1] to access the ‘802.11’ sub-menu.
04
802.11 DS SS
802.IQ v1
N &raquo;
•
Set ‘802.IQ v1’ to ‘Y’ to activate these parameters. and press [F1] to
display ‘802.IQ v1’ parameters.
Range
05 802.IQ v1
Auto Radio Addr Y
Y/N
Radio Address
0
1-3840
Initial RTT
0
0-1000
Protocol Type
2457
1501-65535
802.IQ v1
When 802.IQ v1 is set to “Y”, the attached sub-menu of parameters is enabled.
Auto Radio Addr
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a request is sent to the network controller to
assign a radio address to the vehicle-mount computer radio.
If “Auto Radio Addr” is set to “N”, the value entered in the “Radio Address”
parameter is used. (Refer to &quot;Radio Address&quot; in this section for details about
manually assigned radio addresses.)
Important:
Ensure that all 8525/8530s grouped in the system use the same
addressing process – that is, if you choose to use automatic
radio addressing, use this addressing process for all units
186 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Radio Parameters
operating in the same system. If you choose to assign radio
addresses manually using the “Radio Address” parameter, use
this process for all units in the same system.
Radio Address
The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the
8525/8530 over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned
for each 8525/8530 vehicle-mount computer.
Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)
Round trip time is the elapsed time between a vehicle-mount computer transmission
and an access point acknowledgement. Each 8525/8530 continuously adjusts the
acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a number of
transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the average
round trip time calculated, the computer will send the transmission again.
Because 8525/8530s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number
of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The
computer uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value
for round trip calculations. Once the 8525/8530 begins transmitting and receiving
data, this value will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between
transmissions and acknowledgements.
Protocol Type
“Protocol Type” is used to identify the Ethernet packet frame type sent by the
8525/8530. The default value – 2457 – assigned to this parameter identifies the
Teklogix 802.IQ protocol Ethernet packet frame types.
The “Protocol Type ID” should only be altered if the default value is already being
used to specify another application Ethernet frame type.
Important:
If you change the value assigned to “Protocol Type ID”, ensure
that all 8525/8530s and 9150s in your system use the same number.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
187
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
System Parameters
6.17 System Parameters
03
System
Keyboard
Audio
Pwr Mgmt Ctrl Panel
User Permissions
Auto Start
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
Y
6.17.1 Keyboard
Keyboard
04
Macro Ctrl Panel &raquo;
Indicators
Y
Softkeys
Y
Keyboard Ctrl Panel&raquo;
6.17.1.1 Macro Control Panel
•
Highlight ‘Macro Ctrl Panel’, and press [F1] to display the Macros tab in
the Keyboard Properties dialog box.
Figure 6.6 Macro Dialog Box
Important:
Refer to “Keyboard Macro Keys” on page 82 for detailed
instructions about creating macros.
Important:
For information about using the macro keys you’ve created, refer
to “Macro Keys” on page 158.
188 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Indicators
6.17.1.2 Indicators
When the “Indicators” parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), onscreen indicators are
displayed to indicate the operating condition of the 8525/8530. Refer to “Onscreen
Indicators” on page 41 for a list of possible indicators.
6.17.1.3 Softkeys
Enabling (setting to “Y”) the “Softkeys” parameter displays softkey labels at the
bottom of the screen to indicate the function of each softkey. To block the display of
softkey labels, set this parameter to “N”.
Softkeys are function keys which are programmed to execute specific actions when
pressed. Refer to Table 6.1 on page 158 for a list of softkey labels.
6.17.1.4 Keyboard Ctrl Panel
This menu item displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can
adjust the repeat rate of the keys, the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the
behaviour of the [BLUE] and [ORANGE] keys.
Figure 6.7 Keyboard Properties
Important:
Refer to “Keyboard Properties” on page 79 for details about this
dialog box.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
189
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Audio
6.17.2 Audio
04 Audio
Beep Tone
Beep Time
Error Tone
Error Time
Scan Tone 1
Scan Time 1
Scan Tone 2
Scan Time 2
Scan Tone 3
Scan Time 3
Sounds Ctrl Panel
Range
3000
250
1000
1000
1500
100
2000
100
2500
100
&raquo;
800-3000
0-2000
800-3000
0-2000
800-3000
0-2000
800-3000
0-2000
800-3000
0-2000
see text
Figure 6.8 Audio Menu
Beep Tone And Beep Time
These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or
ANSI session when one of the following is received at the 8525/8530: an advisory, a
hey you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Error Tone And Error Time
These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is
measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1
“Scan tone 1” and “Scan time 1” determine the frequency and duration of the first
beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2
“Scan tone 2” and “Scan time 2” determine the frequency and duration of the
second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3
“Scan tone 3” and “Scan time 3” determine the frequency and duration of the third
beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds.
190 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel
Sounds Ctrl Panel
This option displays the Volume &amp; Sounds Properties dialog box.
Figure 6.9 Adjusting The Volume
This dialog box is used adjust the beeper volume and to select the conditions under
which the 8525/8530 will emit a beep.
Important:
Refer to “Volume And Sound Properties” on page 88 for details
about this dialog box.
6.17.3 Power Mgmt Ctrl Panel
This menu item displays the Power Properties dialog box.
Figure 6.10 Power Properties Dialog Box
Important:
Refer to “Power Management Properties” on page 89 for details
about this dialog box.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
191
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
User Permissions
6.17.4 User Permissions
04
User Permissions
Screen Switch
Y
Font Change
Y
Exit
N
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
At User security level, the operator is restricted to a small group of parameters.
Important:
Only Supervisor and Teklogix level passwords can change the
values of the User options.
Screen Switch
When set to “Y”, the operator can use the “Split screen” parameter to toggle
between screens when multiple applications are running on the 8525/8530. Refer to
“Split Screen” on page 194 for details about using this function.
Font Change
When “Font Change” is set to “Y”, operators at the User level can change the font
size of their 8525/8530s.
Exit
If this parameter is set to “Y”, an operator with user level security can exit Tekterm
by pressing [ALT] [F4]. If “Exit” is set to “N”, the operator cannot exit Tekterm.
6.17.5 Auto Start
“Auto Start” determines whether or not Tekterm is automatically launched when the
8525/8530 is reset. If this parameter is set to “N”, Tekterm will not be launched
when the vehicle-mount resets.
192 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scanner Control Panel
6.18 Scanner Control Panel
This menu item displays a Scanner Properties dialog box in which you can set up
the particulars of your unit’s scanner performance, choose the bar codes which will
be decoded, and so on.
Figure 6.11 Scanner Properties Dialog Box
Important:
Refer to &quot;Scanner Properties Setup&quot; beginning on page 128 for
details about setting up your scanner.
6.19 View Manager
View Manager
Display Shift
Y
Block Cursor
Y
Use Increment
N
X-increment
5
Y-increment
5
Split Screen
&raquo;
Custom Chars
&raquo;
Font Override N&raquo;
Default Colours &raquo;
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
1..40
1..12
see text
see text
see text
see text
Display Shift
If this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the display in application screens shifts so
that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
193
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Split Screen
Block Cursor
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor is presented as a flashing
block. When “Block Cursor” is set to “N”, the cursor is presented as a flashing
underline character.
Use increment
When “Use increment” is enabled (set to “Y”) and the cursor is moved off the
display, the screen contents shift by the values specified in the “X-increment” and
“Y-increment” parameters.
X-increment
This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor
moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use
Increment” is set to “Y”.
Y-increment
This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor
moves out of view. The value assigned here doesn’t take effect until “Use
Increment” is set to “Y”.
6.19.1 Split Screen
04 Split screen
Type
2 Way |||
View IDs
A
This parameter allows you to split the display view so that more than one
application screen can be displayed at the same time. The split screen parameters,
“Type” and “View IDs”, are used to tailor the screen view for your needs.
Type And View IDs
The “Type” parameter determines how a screen will be split. The 8525/8530
supports up to four application screens. The “View IDs” parameter determines
which application screens will be displayed in each pane of the split screen.
“Moving Between Split Screens” on page 196 describes how to move the cursor
from one split screen to the next.
194 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Splitting And Displaying Screens
6.19.1.1 Splitting And Displaying Screens
Before splitting the screen, you need to determine which applications should appear
in each pane of the split screen. The available applications are listed in the main
“Display Menu”. Each application listed in the “Display Menu” is preceded by a
letter – for example, Parameters is preceded by an A. This letter is used in the
“View IDs” string entry field to fix each pane of a split screen to a corresponding
application.
If you need to display the startup “Display Menu”:
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT][0].
To split a screen:
•
With the cursor on the “Type” parameter, use the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow
key to scroll through the types of split screens available.
The vertical and horizontal lines displayed at the “Type” parameter indicate how the
screen will be split – for example, in the sample screen on page 196, the vertical
lines indicate the screen will be vertically split into two segments. The screen can
also be split horizontally 3 ways or 4 ways.
Once you’ve indicated how you want to split the screen in the “Type” parameter:
•
Use the [DOWN] arrow key to move the cursor to the “View IDs”
parameter.
•
For each application you want to display, type the letter corresponding to
the application.
For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical
segments with the Parameters menu in the left pane of the screen and
a TESS session in the right pane. In the “Display Menu”, the letter A
represents “Parameters” and B represents “TESS”. The “Type” and
“View ID” values would be represented as follows:
04 Split screen
Type
2 Way |||
View IDs
AB
•
Press [ENTER].
To display the split screen on the 8525/8530:
•
Press [CTRL] [DOWN] arrow.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
195
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Moving Between Split Screens
6.19.1.2 Moving Between Split Screens
To move the cursor from one pane in a split screen to the next:
•
Press [CTRL] [RIGHT] or [LEFT]. The cursor moves in order from the
left-most pane to the right and from the top-most pane to the bottom.
6.19.1.3 Toggling Between Full &amp; Split Screens
To toggle between a split and full screen format:
•
Press [CTRL] [DOWN] arrow.
The application displayed when toggling from a split to a full screen format is
determined by the cursor location in the split screen. For example, if the cursor
is in the pane of a split screen in which the TESS application is displayed and
[CTRL] [DOWN] is pressed to display a full screen, the TESS application will be
displayed in the full screen.
6.19.1.4 Using The Asterisk As A Wild Card
When a screen is split, the application displayed in each pane is fixed in the “View
IDs” parameter. Using an asterisk * in the “View IDs” parameter indicates that a
particular pane in the split screen is not fixed to any particular application and can
be changed as required.
For example, suppose you want to split the screen into two vertical segments with
the left pane containing the “Parameters” menu and the right pane containing no
fixed application. The “Type” and “View IDs” parameters would be completed as
follows:
04 Split screen
Type
2 Way |||
View IDs
A*
To change the application displayed in the pane with no fixed application:
•
If the cursor is not currently in the pane, press [CTRL] [RIGHT] or [LEFT]
arrow to move the cursor into the appropriate screen.
•
Press [CTRL] [ALT][0] to display the startup “Display Menu”.
•
Type the letter corresponding to the new application you want to display.
196 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Custom Characters (Unicode™)
6.19.2 Custom Characters (Unicode™)
Note:
The Unicode ™ characters created here are accessible only within the Tekterm application. To create Unicode ™ characters that are accessible systemwide, refer to “Unicode Mapping” on page 84.
The “Custom Characters” parameter allows you to create Unicode™ characters not
available directly from the keyboard, including accented characters. Unicode is a
trademark of The Unicode Consortium. You can create up to 20 Unicode™
characters that will be stored in a pop-up menu accessible from any application.
6.19.2.1 Creating A Unicode™ Character
Note:
You can create a Unicode™ character by pressing and holding down
the [ALT] while typing the decimal value that represents the Unicode™ character you want to use. However, you will need to press [ALT] and retype the
decimal value each time you want to use the special character.
The advantage to creating special characters using the “Custom Chars”
parameters is that the characters you create in the customer characters
table are saved in a pop-up window that is accessible from any application.
•
In the Parameters menu, highlight “View Manager” and press [F1].
•
Highlight “Custom Chars”, and press [F1] to display the custom
characters table.
04 Custom Chars
Font Small
U+
0000
U+
0000
•
•
•
•
Position the cursor on ‘Font’ at the top of the table.
•
Press the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] arrow keys until the character set you want to
use is displayed.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
197
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
You can create up to 20 Unicode™ characters in the custom characters table.
To create a Unicode™ value:
•
Replace the 0000 value with a hex value that represents the Unicode™
character you want to use.
•
Press the [DOWN] arrow key to accept the value and move the cursor to the
next field.
When you have finished creating the Unicode™ characters you want to use:
•
Press [F4] to save your changes.
•
Reset the 8525/8530 – press and hold down the [ENTER] and [BLUE] key
simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds.
6.19.2.2 Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
The Unicode™ values you create are stored in a pop-up window that you can access
from any application.
To display the pop-up window within any application:
•
Note:
Press [CTRL] [ALT] [A].
Unicode™ characters that cannot be displayed on your screen with the font
you are currently using are displayed as rectangles in the pop-up window.
(See the sample menu on page 198.) However, the actual Unicode™ value
you created will be sent to the host.
Select item with arrow keys.
Press ENTER when done.
Press ESC to cancel.
•
Use the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] arrow key to position the cursor on the
Unicode™ value you want to use, and press [ENTER].
To close the pop-up menu when you’re done:
•
Press the [ESC] key.
198 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Displaying The Unicode™ Pop-up Window
Font Override
Font Override
04
Font Code
0
... is font 16x64
Font Code
1
... is font 24x80
Font Code
2
... is font 9x53
Font Code
3
... is font 24x128
Font Code
4
... is font 6x40
This parameter is used to redefine the font to which 5 different font codes refer.
Default Colours
04 Default Colours
Foreground
Black
Background
White
Range
see text
see text
Foreground And Background
This menu is used to select the foreground and background colours used within
Tekterm. If an unreadable combination is assigned – the foreground and background
have the same value – the foreground colour will be inverted.
The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and Black.
Note:
The 8525/8530 must be reset – press and hold down the [BLUE] and
[ENTER] keys for a minimum of six seconds – in order for the new colour
assignments to take affect.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
199
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Applications
6.20 Applications
“TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique names so that several different
sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously. 8525/8530s can
support up to 8 sessions at one time.
03 Applications
Range
Type1
Title1
Settings
.
.
.
Type1
Title1
Settings
Important:
#1 ANSI
#1 parts
1 &raquo;
None, ANSI,TESS,Console,RadioStats
see text
see text
#8 None
#8
8 &raquo;
These applications will become active only after the changes
made in the Application screen are saved by pressing [F4] –
the SAVE key.
Type And Title
Up to eight applications can be entered in this parameter. The “Type #” field
indicates the type of session you will be running. The “Title #” parameter should be
completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator.
•
The available options for the “Type #” field are TESS, ANSI, Console,
RadioStats and None.
Use the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to scroll through the options.
•
The “Title #” field needs a name that is meaningful to the operator. In addition, “TESS” and “ANSI” applications require unique titles so that several
different sessions of “TESS” and “ANSI” can operate simultaneously.
These titles will appear in startup “Display Menu”. Each session will have
its own set of parameters.
•
To display the “Settings” menu for your application, position the cursor
on “Settings”, and press [F1] – the NEXT key.
Note:
Before you can access the “Settings” menu, you must first complete the
“Name” and “Type” fields.
200 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
ANSI Settings
6.20.1 ANSI Settings
Ansi
04
Auto Term #
Terminal #
Host Conn
Screen
Xmit Modes
Kbd Modes
Edit Modes
Serial
Host Char Set
Anchor View
N&raquo;
1
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
N&raquo;
Range
see text
1..1024
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional ANSI
information is documented in “ANSI Emulation” on page 170.
Auto Term#
Note:
Refer to “Group” on page 201 for additional instructions.
When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique number is assigned for the current
ANSI session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #”
parameter is ignored.
Note:
“Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host Conn”
parameter or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu (see “802.IQ v1”
on page 186).
Group
Auto Term#
Group
1
Range
1-5
When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the
group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.
Terminal #
For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the number for the ANSI session and
uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525/8530.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
201
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn
Other applications running in the 8525/8530, such as a TESS session or another
ANSI session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix
8525/8530 using the radio link must have a unique number.
6.20.1.1 Host Conn
Host Conn
Range
Conn Type
Telnet 802.IQv2 9010t Telnet Narrow Band
Settings
&raquo;
see text
Conn Type
The options for this a parameter vary depending on the type of application you are
running – ANSI or TESS and the type of radio installed in your 8525/8530.
For ANSI applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following types
of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct), Telnet and Narrow Band. Keep in mind
that choosing Telnet allows the 8525/8530 to communicate directly with the host.
Settings
Note:
The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as the
“Conn Type”. In addition, this sub-menu varies depending on which option
you’ve selected – Telnet or 9010t.
Telnet Settings
Host
Port
23
Terminal Type
VT220
ENTER Pmpt
Press ENTER to connect
ESC Prompt
Press ESC to cancel
Auto Login
N&raquo;
Func Key Remap N&raquo;
Arrow Key Remap N&raquo;
9010t Settings
Host
Port
9999
Range
see text
0-32767
see text
see text
see text
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Range
see text
0-9999
202 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn
Host
This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###
or a host name if DNS is used.
Port
“Port” specifies the 9010t (TCP Direct) or Telnet port number. The default 9010t
port number assigned is 9999, the maximum allowable value. The default Telnet
port number assigned is 23 with a maximum allowable value of 32767.
Terminal Type
This parameter allows the 8525/8530 to perform its own emulation (as opposed to
the controller). The value assigned to this parameter informs the host of the terminal
type the session is emulating.
ENTER Pmpt
This string indicates that the 8525/8530 is waiting for the user to press [ENTER] at
the time of connection.
ESC Prompt
This string indicates that the user can press the [ESC] key to terminate a connection
attempt before the connection is established.
Auto Login
Auto Login
Login Prompt
Login
Password Prompt
Password
Password Echo
Login Failed
gin:
word:
Y
incorrect
Range
see text
see text
see text
see text
Y/N
see text
The “Auto Login” parameters are used to define whether or not the 8525/8530 will
attempt to log in automatically.
The Auto Login sequence is as follows:
1. Host sends “Login Prompt”.
2. 8525/8530 responds with “Login”.
3. Host sends “Password Prompt”.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
203
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn
4. 8525/8530 responds with “Password”.
5. Host may send password echo.
6. 8525/8530 ignores password echo if “Password Echo” is set to “Y”,
otherwise skip to step 7.
7. 8525/8530 looks for “Login Failed” in next transmission from host.
8. Login successful or Login failed and return to step 1.
Login Prompt
When the unit receives the string assigned to this parameter, it will respond with
“Login”.
Login
The unit responds with this string when it receives a “Login Prompt”.
Password Prompt
When the 8525/8530 receives this string, it responds with a “Password”.
Password
The computer responds with this string when it receives a “Password Prompt”.
Password Echo
When this parameter is set to “Y”, the host will echo data back to the terminal after
receiving a “Password”.
Login Failed
When the unit receives this string, it assumes that the login attempt has failed and
returns to the “Enter Pmpt”.
204 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn
Func Key Remap
In ANSI, each function key has a default string associated with it. When a function
key is pressed, the corresponding default string is sent to the host. The ‘Func Key
Remap’ table allows these function key character sequences to be redefined.
07
F 1
F 2
F 3
•
•
•
F28
F29
F30
Func Key Remap
1B 4F 50 00
1B 4F 51 00
1B 4F 52 00
1B
1B
1B
5B
5B
5B
34
34
34
32
33
34
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
7E
7E
00
00
00
00
To change values:
•
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] arrow key to highlight a function key.
•
Press the [TAB] key to move through the string of values.
•
Either type new values, or press the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] arrow key to
change the values.
Arrow Key Remap
In ANSI, the arrow keys have a default string associated with them to move the
cursor in the direction of the arrow. The ‘Arrow Key Remap’ table allows the arrow
key character sequences to be redefined.
Arrow Key Remap
Up Arrow
1B 5B
Down Arrow
1B 5B
Right Arrow
1B 5B
Left Arrow
1B 5B
07
41
42
43
44
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
To change arrow key values:
•
Press the [UP] or [DOWN] arrow key to highlight an arrow key.
•
Press the [TAB] key to move through the string of values.
•
Either type new values, or press the [LEFT] or [RIGHT] arrow key to
change the values.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
205
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
6.20.1.2 Screen
Screen
05
# of Pages
# of Rows
# of Cols
Default Font
80-col. Font
132-col. Font
Video
Label F1-F10
Colour override
4
24
80
16x64
16x64
16x64
&raquo;
&raquo;
N&raquo;
Range
0..16
4..60
80 or 132
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
# of Pages
This parameter defines how many pages are accessible to application programs. The
ANSI control functions – Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP) – are used to
select another page. These pages are independent of each other so that if lines of text
scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected.
There is no error indication from the vehicle-mount computer if the memory
required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in
the computer.
# of Rows
This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer
application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This
page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle-mount’s display.
Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.
Note:
The value in this parameter must be an even number.
# of Cols
This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host
computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this
width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the display. Display
panning is used if the page is wider than the display.
Note:
The value in this parameter must be an even number.
206 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Default font
This parameter determines the default font that appears when the 8525/8530
memory is reset.
•
Use the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to scroll through the available
options.
80-col. font &amp; 132-col. font
These parameters are used to set the font size on the screen if the default font is not
acceptable. An escape sequence must be sent from the host before a vehicle-mount
can switch to either 80-col. font or 132-col. font.
•
Use the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow keys to scroll through the size options
for these parameters.
Video
06 Video
Bold
Blink
Reverse
Underline
NONE
BLNK
REV
ULIN
Range
see text
see text
see text
see text
The possible attributes for these parameters are: “BLNK” (blink), “ULIN”
(underline), “REV” (reverse), and “NONE” (normal).
Bold
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created
with the “Bold” ANSI attribute.
Blink
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields
created with the “Blink” ANSI attribute.
Reverse
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields created
with the “Reverse” ANSI attribute.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
207
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Underline
This parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be assigned to fields
created with the “Underline” ANSI attribute.
Label F1-F10
Note:
This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about completing
this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 181.
Label F1-10
06
F1
•
•
•
F10
Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions
in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video
labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be
reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F10” parameter.
To edit a label:
•
Note:
Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the
Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes
the corresponding key’s function.
The number of allowable characters in a softkey label is dynamically
calculated based on the screen size and the number of softkeys the unit supports
Colour Override
Note:
This menu is available only if the 8525/8530 is equipped with a
colour display.
06 Colour Override
Foreground
Black
Background
White
Range
see text
see text
208 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
Foreground And Background
When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed
in the ANSI sessions. These colour settings will override the “Default Colours” set
from within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 199
for details.
The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and Black.
6.20.1.3 Xmit Modes
05 Xmit Modes
Xmit Count
Xmit Wait
Dev Attr
Auto-Answer
7 bit
Block Mode
99
1
[ ? 62 ; 1 ; 2 ; 6 c
Y
&raquo;
Range
0..99
0..999
see text
see text
Y/N
see text
Xmit Count
This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are
buffered by the 8525/8530 before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is
selected, the vehicle-mount transmits only according to the “Xmit Wait” parameter.
If the ANSI block mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99.
Note:
If the 8525/8530 is not in local edit mode, the [ENTER], arrow, [CTRL], and
function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit
Count” parameter setting.
Xmit Wait
This parameter determines the length of time the 8525/8530 collects keystrokes
before transmitting them to the host. This value is specified in increments of one
10th of a second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the
computer transmits only according to the “Xmit Count” parameter.
Note:
If the 8525/8530 is not in local edit mode, the [ENTER], arrow, [CTRL], and
function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the “Xmit
Wait” parameter setting.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
209
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
Dev Attr
This string entry parameter specifies a device attribute string. This string can be up
to 16 characters long. The computer sends this string to the host when it receives a
DA or DECID control. The example shown in the “Xmit Modes” screen sample on
page 209 is the device attribute sent to a VAX, identifying the Psion Teklogix
vehicle-mount computer as a VT220 terminal. This parameter may or may not be
set, depending on the requirements of the host computer.
Auto-Answer
This string can be up to 30 characters long and is sent by the 8525/8530 as a reply to
an “ENQ” character from the host. The “Auto-Answer” string is programmable in
the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to
automatically send the username and password when logging into the host. Refer
to &quot;Macro Control Panel&quot; beginning on page 188 for additional details about
macros.
7 bit
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the vehicle-mount computer transmits
8 bit controls. When enabled (set to “Y”), the vehicle-mount transmits 7 bit controls.
This parameter applies to character mode, block mode, and media copy mode.
Block Mode
06 Block Mode
Kbd lock
N
Xmit key
N
FETM
N
GATM
N
MATM
N
SATM
Y
TTM
Y
EOL chars
EOB chars
All modes in this section affect the data stream sent to the host computer, the serial
port and the console port. These modes apply to the Block mode (Local Editing)
and the Media Copy function, unless otherwise noted. Consult the Teklogix ANSI
Terminal Programmer’s Manual for more information.
210 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Xmit Modes
Kbd lock
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the 8525/8530 does not lock the
keyboard after a block mode transmission. When enabled (set to “Y”), the keyboard
is locked after a transmission. The application program must unlock the keyboard
by resetting the Keyboard Action Mode (KAM), using the Reset Mode (RM) or
Enable Manual Input (EMI) controls.
Xmit key
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the key that causes the 8525/8530
vehicle-mount
to transmit is not sent to the host as part of the transmitted data. When enabled
(set to “Y”), the key that causes a transmission is sent after the page data has
been sent to the host. This parameter applies only to block mode.
FETM
When the Format Effector Transfer Mode (FETM) parameter is disabled (set to
“N”), Format Effectors are inserted in data sent to the host or included in data when
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the Format
Effectors are not inserted into the data sent to the host and are not included in the
data transferred to the console or serial ports.
GATM
When the Guarded Area Transfer Mode (GATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
only unguarded data is transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or
serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), both guarded and unguarded data can be
transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
MATM
When the Multiple Area Transfer Mode (MATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
only the selected area containing the cursor can be transmitted to the host or
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), all selected
areas can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
This mode is significant only if the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) is disabled.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
211
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
SATM
When the Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”),
the selected areas defined by SSA/ESA and DAQ can be transmitted to the host or
transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the full contents
of the buffer can be transmitted to the host or transferred to the console or serial ports.
TTM
When the Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the
cursor position determines the end of the string that can be transmitted to the host
or transferred to the console or serial ports. When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor
position is ignored.
EOL chars
This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after
each line in a block transmission. If the parameter is not used, the rules specified in
“Transmitted Data Stream” are used to determine end of line characters.
EOB chars
This string entry parameter specifies a string of up to 8 characters that are sent after
each block transmission.
6.20.1.4 Kbd Modes
05 Kbd Modes
Arrow mode
Echo mode
DEL key
BKSP key
PrintScreen key
Xmit Enter
Insert
Newline
Disable kbd
DEC Cursor Keys
cursor
Smart
DEL
BS
16
Y
N
N
N
cursor mode
Range
cursor, field
Smart, Local, Host
BS, CLEAR
DEL, CLEAR
1..255
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Arrow mode
This parameter determines whether arrow keys move the cursor within a field or
between fields. When set to “field”, pressing an arrow key causes the cursor to
move to the next field in the direction of the arrow. When set to “cursor”, pressing
the [LEFT] and [RIGHT] arrow keys move the cursor within the current field.
212 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
Echo Mode
This parameter selects echo mode for the 8525/8530. The available modes are
“Local”, “Host”, and “Smart”.
Local:
In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed
before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action
at the 8525/8530, as shown in Table on page 213.
Host:
In this mode, the vehicle-mount computer sends all keyboard
entries to the host and displays only data received from the host.
Smart: This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a
character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by
the host computer. The 8525/8530 displays all printable characters
on the screen before sending them to the host. The vehicle-mount
compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed
on the page and fixes the display if the host echoes are different.
The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25.
Any additional characters are sent to the host but not displayed.
When the 8525/8530 is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled.
Key
Function
ENTER
In newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the first column
of the next line. In line feed mode, this key moves the cursor to
column one of the current line.
CTRL-G (Bell)
The 8525/8530 beeps.
CTRL-H (Backspace)
The cursor moves back one space.
CTRL-I (Tab)
The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop.
CTRL-J (Line Feed)
CTRL-L (Form Feed)
The cursor moves down one line in the same column.
CTRL-K (Vertical Tab)
The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set.
DEL
This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and
moves the cursor to the left by one position.
Table 6.4 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
213
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Kbd Modes
DEL Key
This parameter determines whether the [DEL] key acts as a delete key, erasing
the character to the right of the cursor, or a backspace key, erasing the character
to the left of the cursor or as a clear key, erasing the contents of a field.
BKSP Key
This parameter determines whether the [BKSP] key acts as a backspace key, erasing
the character to the left of the cursor, as a delete key, erasing the character to the
right of the cursor or as a clear key, erasing the contents of a field.
PrintScreen Key
This parameter determines the “hot-key” for printing the screen contents via the
8525/8530 serial port. The default is [CTRL] P (16).
Note:
The 8525/8530’s port must be set to “printer” (see“Ports– Tether And Console” on page 241).
Xmit Enter
The [ENTER] key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next
field. However, some applications require that the [ENTER] key start a
transmission from the 8525/8530. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes
the [ENTER] key to start a transmission.
Insert
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), it behaves in “replace” mode –
a character entered at the keyboard or received from the host replaces the
character at the cursor position. The cursor then advances one character position.
When enabled (set to “Y”), the character entered at the keyboard or received from
the host is inserted at the cursor position after shifting the characters at and following
the cursor forward one position. The cursor is advanced one position. The extent
of the characters affected by the shift depends on the setting of the “Edit Extent”
parameter (see page 216).
214 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Edit Modes
Newline
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), an LF character received from the
host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition,
the [ENTER] key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to “Y”), an LF character
received from the host causes the cursor to move to the first column of the next
line. The [ENTER] key transmits both a CR and an LF.
Disable kbd
Setting this parameter to “Y” disables the keyboard and scanner. When this
parameter is set to “N”, the keyboard and scanner are enabled.
DEC Cursor Keys
This parameter can be set to either Cursor Mode or Appl. Mode. Cursor Mode
causes the cursor keys to generate ANSI cursor control sequences. Application
Mode causes the cursor keys to send application control functions.
6.20.1.5 Edit Modes
04 Edit Modes
Auto wrap
Erasure mode
Tab stop mode
Edit extent
Disp controls
N
N
N
Line
N
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Y/N
Auto wrap
If “Auto wrap” is disabled (set to “N”), characters received when the cursor is at the
right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If “Auto wrap”
is enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is
filled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin.
Erasure mode
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), erase functions can only erase
unprotected characters. When enabled (set to “Y”), the erase functions can
erase characters regardless of their protected state.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
215
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Serial
Tab stop mode
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the setting and clearing of horizontal
tab stops apply to the same horizontal position of all lines on the page. When enabled
(set to ‘Y”), horizontal tab setting and clearing apply only to the current line.
Edit extent
This parameter selects the extent of the display to be affected by the ICH and DCH
controls and received character insertion. The possible values are Line, Area,
Display or Fld. The shifting caused by ICH, DCH and character insertion is
confined to the selected extent.
Disp controls
When this parameter is disabled (set to “N”), any control codes received from the
host are performed as described. When enabled (set to “Y”), any received control
functions are displayed and are not performed. If any C0 or C1 controls are received
from the host, their standard ANSI mnemonics are displayed in reverse video. Other
characters are displayed as normal characters. This mode can also be set with the Set
Mode (SM) control but can only be reset from the Parameters menu.
6.20.1.6 Serial
05 Serial
Primary Port
Secondary Port
Async In
Start
End
Any Available
Any Available
N
0
0
Range
see text
see text
Y/N
0..255
0..255
Primary Port &amp; Secondary Port
ANSI print commands (such as ‘MC’ or Media Copy) control the transfer of data to
and from the serial and console ports on the 8525/8530. At the vehicle-mount, the
value assigned at the ‘Primary Port’ and ‘Secondary Port’ parameters determines
which port the ANSI print command will identify and use as primary and secondary.
The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st printer, 2nd printer, 3rd printer, 4th
printer, 1st Serial, 2nd Serial, 3rd Serial, 4th Serial and Disabled.
216 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Char Set
Async In
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the serial (async) port is ready to
receive input at all times.
Start/End
These parameters specify the “start” and “end” characters of input received from
the serial (async) port.
6.20.1.7 Host Char Set
The ‘Host Char Set’ menu allows you to specify a character set in the ‘Lower’ and
‘Upper’ character tables.
05 Host Char Set
Lower ASCII ISO-IR 006
Upper DEC Multinational
Note:
When an 8-bit set is selected from the ‘Lower’ character set, the ‘Upper’
character set will change to the same value. The ‘Upper’ character set cannot be altered until a non-8-bit value is assigned for the ‘Lower’
character set.
To choose ‘Lower’ and ‘Upper character sets:
•
Position the cursor on the ‘Lower’ or ‘Upper’ parameter, and press the
[RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to display the character set options.
•
Press [F4] to save your selection to memory.
Important:
When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a
rectangular box is used as a substitute.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
217
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Anchor View
6.20.1.8 Anchor View
Anchor
05
x origin
y origin
1
1
Range
1..24
1..80
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on
the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and
“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the
screen, will be fixed.
x origin and y origin
The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left
corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify
the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.
6.20.2 TESS Settings
TESS
04
Auto Term #
Terminal #
Host Conn
Screen
Characters
Tests
Features
Scanner
Fields
Anchor View
Emulation
Range
N&raquo;
1
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
N&raquo;
&raquo;
see
see
see
see
see
see
see
see
see
see
text
text
text
text
text
text
text
text
text
text
Each session you create has its own “Settings” parameters. Additional TESS
information is documented in “TESS Emulation” on page 161.
Auto Term#
Note:
“Auto Term#” is available when 802.IQv2 is assigned to the “Host Conn”
parameter (page 219) or when 802.IQv1 is enabled in the Radio Menu (see
“802.IQ v1” on page 186).
218 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Host Conn.
When this parameter is set to “Y”, a unique unit number is assigned for the current
TESS session. If “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, any value assigned to the “Terminal #”
parameter is ignored.
Group
Auto Term#
Group
1
Range
1-5
When “Auto Term#” is set to “Y”, the ‘Group’ parameter is used to identify the
group or pool of numbers from which an auto-address is chosen.
Terminal #
For every application session you create, the “Terminal #” assigned must be nonzero and unique. This parameter defines the terminal number for the TESS session
and uniquely identifies all transmissions to and from the 8525/8530.
Other applications running in the 8525/8530, such as an ANSI session or another
TESS session must each have a different number. In addition, each Psion Teklogix
8525/8530 using the radio link must have a unique number.
6.20.2.1 Host Conn.
Host Conn
Conn Type
802.IQv2
Settings
&raquo;
Range
see text
see text
Conn Type
For TESS applications, this parameter allows you to choose one of the following
types of connections: 802.IQv2, 9010t (TCP Direct), 2392/Telnet, 3274/Telnet,
5250/Telnet and Narrow Band.
Settings
Note:
The “Settings” sub-menu is not available when 802.IQv2 is selected as the
“Conn Type”
Range
Settings
Host
see text
Port
9999
0-9999
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
219
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Host
This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###
Port
“Port” specifies the port number. By default, the port is assigned the value 9999.
6.20.2.2 Screen
05
Screen
# of Cols
# of Rows
Origin Scroll
Field Scroll
Pages Saved
App. Parameter
Label F1-F10
Colour Override
80
24
N
N
16
0
&raquo;
N&raquo;
Range
20..132
4..100
Y/N
Y/N
1..16
-1..79
see text
see text
# of Cols
This parameter defines the logical page width (in characters) used by the host
computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this
width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the 8525/8530 display.
Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display.
Note:
The value in this parameter must be an even number.
# of Rows
This parameter defines the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer
application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This
page length cannot be smaller than the length of the vehicle-mount computer’s
display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display.
Note:
The value in this parameter must be an even number.
Origin Scroll
When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left
corner) after “LOCK-H” or “LOCK-B” messages.
220 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Screen
Field Scroll
When enabled (set to “Y”), the display window moves to the left after entering a
new entry field.
Pages Saved
This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at
the 8525/8530. Storing frequently used page data at the 8525/8530 reduces the need
for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data
can reduce the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages
decreases the available memory for other functions.
App. Parameter
The “Application” parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to
the TESS query command. Enter zero to disable this parameter.
Label F1-F10
Note:
This menu uses string entry fields. For detailed information about completing
this type of field, refer to “String Entry Parameters” on page 181.
06
F1
•
•
•
F10
Label F1-F10
Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specific actions
in your application. These keys are identified through softkey labels – reverse video
labels that are displayed at the bottom of the screen. These softkey labels can be
reconfigured using the menu attached to the “Label F1-F10” parameter.
To edit a label:
•
Note:
Position the cursor in the appropriate function key field within the
Label menu, and type a new name – preferably one that describes
the corresponding key’s function.
Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will
be shortened to better fit in the available space on your display.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
221
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Characters
Colour Override
Note:
The menu is available only if your 8525/8530 is equipped with a colour display.
Range
06 Colour Override
Foreground
Black
Background
White
see text
see text
Foreground And Background
When “Colour Override” is set to ‘Y’, the colours chosen in this menu are displayed
in the TESS sessions. These colour settings override the “Default Colours” set from
within the “View Manager” menu. Refer to “Default Colours” on page 199 for
details.
The allowable values are: Red, Green, Yellow, Blue, Magenta, Cyan, White and
Black.
6.20.2.3 Characters
05 Characters
Char Set
V Match Char
H Match Char
Fill Chr
Upper Case
&raquo;
0
0
46
N
Range
see text
0..255
0..255
0..255
Y/N
Char Set
06 Char Set
ISO
N&raquo;
IBM
Y&raquo;
DEC
N&raquo;
Misc.
N&raquo;
This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix
computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” is used to visually guide you to the selected
character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM
indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.
222 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Characters
To choose a character set:
•
Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press
[F1] to display the character set options.
•
To activate a character set, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to set it
to “Y”.
Important:
If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and
a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the
8525/8530 screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute.
Please review “Default font” on page 231.
If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is
used as a substitute.
V Match Chr
This parameter enables visible field matching and defines the character that identifies
visible field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load
data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The vehicle-mount
beeps if
the entered data does not match. Visible field matching means that the data to be
matched is displayed in the entry field.
Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to
identify visible match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.
Note:
Another method of field matching is available directly through the
TESS data stream.
H Match Chr
This parameter enables hidden field matching and defines the character that identifies
hidden field match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load
data into an entry field that is compared with the user’s input. The 8525/8530 beeps
if the entered data does not match. Hidden field matching means that the data to be
matched is not displayed in the entry field.
Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to
identify hidden match field data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature.
Note:
Another method of field matching is available directly through the
TESS data stream.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
223
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tests
Fill Chr
This parameter specifies the character that identifies empty entry fields. Enter
the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. The most commonly used
characters are:
_ (underline)
. (period)
Note:
Enter 95
Enter 46
8525/8530s in some systems may use the “space” character with the host
using reverse video attributes to mark entry fields.
Upper Case
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), lowercase input is converted
to uppercase.
6.20.2.4 Tests
05 Tests
AutoRep Fn
AutoRep T/O
7
5
Range
0..63
0..255
AutoRep Fn
This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode.
The value represents the number of the function key – not the ASCII decimal
equivalent. After sending this key, the unit locks and waits for the host to unlock the
8525/8530. To disable “AutoRep Fn”, set the “AutoRep T/O” parameter to zero.
AutoRep T/O
This parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the 8525/8530 unlocking
and the next transmission of the function key specified by the above parameter.
A value of zero disables auto reply mode.
224 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
6.20.2.5 Features
05 Features
Printer
Binary print
Queuing
Lcl Process
Send Mile
Next X
Kbd Locked
Remap Passthru
Disable Beep
Serial
Any Available
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
&raquo;
&raquo;
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Printer
The value assigned for the “Printer” parameter determines which port the print
command will use. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st printer, 2nd
printer, 3rd printer, 4th printer and Disabled.
Binary print
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the page displayed on the 8525/8530
computer is spooled as is, except for trailing white-space removal. When disabled
(set to “N”), each line of the page displayed on the vehicle-mount is preceded by a
linefeed (LF) and followed by a carriage return (CR).
Queuing
This parameter enables and disables queuing mode (see “Queuing Mode” on
page 170). It also enables TESS procedures to be loaded into the 8525/8530. This
parameter should be enabled if local procedures and the ability to switch between
hosts within a TESS session are required. Changes to this parameter take effect only
after the 8525/8530 is reset.
Lcl Process – Save on Reset
The menu item “Local Process” has a sub-menu attached to it – “Save on Reset”.
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data stored in the 8525/8530 is saved if
the unit is reset. Local procedures are defined on page 169.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
225
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
Send Mile
This parameter controls the sending of a milestone from the 8525/8530 after a
“hey_you” command. Consult the Teklogix Screen Subsystem (TESS) User Manual
for more information on milestones.
Next X
This parameter enables and disables the next messages used in queuing mode.
Kbd Locked
This parameter allows you to lock (set to “Y”) or unlock (set to “N”) the keyboard
for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the function
keys, arrow keys and the [ENTER] key are still functional. The 8525/8530 emits
an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to
this parameter take effect only after the unit is reset.
Remap Passthru
When this parameter is set to “Y”, passthru data is remapped from the host charset
to the port charset. (Normally passthru data is sent as is to the port without any
remapping.)
Disable Beep
Setting this parameter to “y” disables the beep generated by the ‘o’, ‘G’ and ‘#’
TESS commands. Keep in mind that Error and Scan beeps are not disabled.
226 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
Serial
06 Serial
Serial Port
Serial Out
Serial In
SI mode
SI prefix
SI suffix
SI CRC
SI Fkey
SO prefix
SO suffix
SO CRC
Range
Any Available
see text
Y
Y/N
N
Y/N
see text
10
0..255
13
0..255
N
Y/N
0
0..255
10
0..255
13
0..255
N
Y/N
Serial Port
TESS print commands control the transfer of data to and from the serial and printer
ports on the 8525/8530. At the vehicle-mount, the value assigned at the ‘Serial Port’
parameter ranks which port the TESS print command will identify and use as the
first to fourth port. The allowable options are: Any Available, 1st Serial, 2nd Serial,
3rd Serial, 4th Serial and Disabled.
Serial Out
This parameter enables serial port output fields.
Serial In
This parameter enables the serial port input fields. If enabled (set to “Y”), the TESS
application has exclusive use of the serial port. Acceptance of data in a SI field is
determined by the SI prefix and suffix.
SI mode
The possible values for this parameter are field (the default) and command. When
the SI mode is set to field, data received through the serial port is displayed in the
serial input fields. If you are using serial-input fields, make sure the “SI mode”
parameter is set to field.
When “SI mode” is set to command, data received by the serial port is transmitted as
Passthrough data to the host.
Note:
“Command” mode is supported by SDKs but not by emulations.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
227
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Features
SI prefix
This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of
0 (zero) indicates no prefix.
SI suffix
This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of
0 (zero) indicates no suffix.
SI CRC
This parameter enables or disables CRC validity check on serial input. When
enabled (set to “Y”), a packet is rejected if the CRC is not valid.
Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), each time a DLE (^P=0x10)
character is encountered in the serial input, it is removed and the character
following it will be replaced with its 1’s complement.
SI Fkey
This parameter allows you to choose the function key you want appended to the
serial input. For example, entering a value of “1” appends [F1] to serial input. A
value of “0” (zero) disables this parameter; a suffix is not added.
Note:
Data is transmitted as soon as the function key has been appended.
SO prefix
This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the start character. A value of
“0” (zero) indicates no prefix.
SO suffix
This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. Enter an
ASCII numeric equivalent from 0 to 255 to represent the end character. A value of
“0” (zero) indicates no suffix.
SO CRC
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), a CRC16 value is appended to the
serial output message.
228 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scanner
Also, when this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), for each control character in
the serial output stream, a DLE is inserted to precede that character. The control
character is replaced with its 1’s complement.
6.20.2.6 Scanner
05
Scanner
Cont Nxt Fld
Append Enter
Append F0
Mixed AIAG
Rjct if Alpha
Beam Lockout
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Cont Nxt Fld
This parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to “Y”), this
parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the field length to continue in the
next field.
If “ContNxtField” is disabled (set to “N”), OFF data will flow into the next field.
Append Enter
When enabled (set to “Y”), “Append Enter” causes an [ENTER] code to be
appended to the bar code. The [ENTER] code completes the entry of the bar code
and moves the cursor to the next field.
Append F0
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes an [F0] code to be appended to the
bar code. The [F0] code completes the entry of the bar code data in the field.
Mixed AIAG
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), AIAG labels are always accepted and
processed – even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the
partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are
rejected if field entry is in progress.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
229
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Fields
Rjct if Alpha
When the cursor is in a numeric field and “Rjct if Alpha” is enabled (set to “Y”),
bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected.
Beam Lockout
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current
session is in “LOCK-H” mode.
6.20.2.7 Fields
Fields
05
Field Order
Enter To F0
Enter On Arrow
Video
All Fld Video
Default Font
Entry Mode
Open Fky Only
Ign Bcode_fld
Enh Edit Mode
Valid Numerics
Y
Y
Y
&raquo;
Y
16x30
field
N
N
N
+-%*/.,$
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Y/N
see text
see text
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Field Order
This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between fields. The next
field can be defined by location on the screen or by the assignment of field numbers.
When enabled (set to “Y”), the cursor moves according to field location. If disabled
(set to “N”), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the fields.
Enter To F0
The [ENTER] key normally enters data into a field and moves the cursor to the next
field. However, some applications require that the [ENTER] key start a transmission
from the 8525/8530. When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter causes the [ENTER]
key to be interpreted as [F0] which starts a transmission.
Enter On Arr
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow keys can be used to complete
data entry into a field.
230 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Fields
Video
06 Video
Blink
Bold
Reverse
BLNK
ULIN
REV
Range
see text
see text
see text
Blink
The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be
assigned to fields created with the “Blink” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),
“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
Bold
The value assigned to this parameter specifies the actual video attributes to be
assigned to fields created with the “Bold” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK” (blink),
“ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
Reverse
The value assigned to the “Reverse” parameter specifies the actual video attributes
to be assigned to fields created with the “Reverse” TESS attribute – that is, “BLNK”
(blink), “ULIN” (underline), “REV” (reverse) or “NONE” (normal).
All Fld Video
Usually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry field. When this
parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the entire field (including blanks) takes on the
video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry fields with
reverse video.
Default font
This parameter determines the default font that appears when the memory is reset.
•
Use the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to scroll through the options.
Entry Mode
“Entry Mode” parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are:
insert, replace, field and fcursor. “TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement” on
page 164 describes these modes in detail.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
231
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Anchor View
Open Fky Only
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the screen is open for function keys
only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is
open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the first field (if it exists).
Ign Bcode_fld
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), fields that were defined as “bar code
only” accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they
behave as data entry fields.
Enh Edit Mode
This mode provides extended (enhanced) functions to users of Psion Teklogix’ IBM
5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), the arrow
keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by fixed or entry fields.
Certain 5250 emulation keys (e.g. Field Exit) that were originally available only
when “Enh Edit Mode” was set to “Y” are now active at all times in TESS
applications.
Refer to “IBM 5250 Emulation Keys” on page 162 for details about these keys.
Valid Numerics
This parameter is used to configure valid characters for numeric fields to a
maximum of 39 characters. Since this field is numeric, numbers 0 through 9 do not
need to be configured. The default values for this parameter are: + - % / . , $.
6.20.2.8 Anchor View
Anchor
05
x origin
y origin
1
1
Range
1..24
1..80
When enabled (set to “Y”), this parameter locks the display at a defined location on
the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The “x origin” and
“y origin” coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper left corner of the
screen, will be fixed.
232 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
x origin and y origin
The “x origin” parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left
corner of the screen will be anchored. The “y origin” parameter is used to specify
the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored.
6.20.2.9 Emulation
Note:
These parameters are only accessible when one of the following TESS ‘Host
Conn’ options is selected: ‘2392/Telnet’, ‘3274/Telnet’ or ‘5250/Telnet’.
2392/Telnet Emulation
05 Emulation
Send CR with Fkey
Features
N
&raquo;
Range
Y/N
see text
Send CR with FKEY
A function key press generates a string of text to be sent back to the host. If this
parameter is enabled, a carriage return is appended to the function key.
Features – 2392/Telnet
Features
06
Clear Entry Fields N
Passthru Printing
N
AIAG Character
0
Barcode Character
0
Serial IO Character 0
Fixed Field Ovrhd
5
Enable Alarm
N
Command Region Up
0
Command Region Down 0
Command Region Left 0
Command Region Right 0
Range
Y/N
Y/N
0-255
0-255
0-255
0-80
Y/N
0-24
0-24
0-80
0-80
Clear Entry Fields
When this parameter is set to ‘Y’, an empty entry field is created in place of an entry
field filled with spaces.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
233
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
Note:
This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent
to the host remains unaffected.
Passthru Printing
Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows the host to send data directly to the 8525/8530
serial port. This option is most commonly used for printing.
AIAG Character
This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code
of the AIAG character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature.
When a bar code data is scanned, the 8525/8530 searches for AIAG fields on the
current page that can accept the bar code data. The application program
distinguishes an entry field as AIAG by preceding the field with this special mode
character which indicates the existence of AIAG fields.
Barcode Character
Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar
code reader. The application program identifies a barcode-input-only entry field by
preceding the field with a special character.
This parameter is used to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character code
of the barcode-input-only character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature.
Serial IO Character
Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output
to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by
preceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field,
the data will be sent to the 8525/8530’s serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the
field accepts data from the 8525/8530’s serial port.
This parameter allows you to enter a decimal representation of the ASCII character
code of this special character. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature.
Fixed Field Ovrhd
This parameter defines the maximum number of characters allowed within two
adjacent, fixed fields that can be sent as a single field. For example, if two fields are
4 characters apart and this parameter is set to 5, these fields are joined into a single
field of data. The allowable range for this field is 0 to 80.
This feature affects fields with the “Normal” display attribute only.
234 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
Enable Alarm
If this parameter is set to ‘Y’, the 8525/8530 emits a beep when the word ALARM
appears on the application screen, in the location specified by the “Command
Region” parameter.
Command Region Up &amp; Down And Command Region Left &amp; Right
The value assigned to the ‘Command Region Up’ and ‘Command Region Down’
parameters represent rows on the 8525/8530 screen. The allowable values range
from 0 to 24.
The value assigned to ‘Command Region Left’ and ‘Command Region Right’
parameters represent columns on the 8525/8530 screen. The allowable values range
from 0 to 80.
These four numbers represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner
and the lower right corner of the command region. Currently, the only commands
supported in the command region are ALARM and FONT:
3274/Telnet Emulation
Emulation
05
Fujitsu Host
Intl EBCDIC
Nulls in Fields
IP for SysReq
BRK for Attn
LU Name Enabled
LU Name
Features
FKEY0-7
FKEY8-15
FKEY16-23
FKEY24-31
FKEY32-39
N
N
N
N
N
N
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
Range
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
Fujitsu Host
If this parameter is set to ‘Y’, data is sent in Fujitsu format. Enabling ‘Fujitsu Host’
causes the standard IBM formatting codes (for start of field, setting buffers, etc.) to
be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
235
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
Intl EBCDIC
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘Y’), the ‘international’ EBCDIC character set is
used, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters.
Nulls in Fields
Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows ‘null’ characters – e.g., hyphens (-) or periods
(.) – to fill in empty entry fields.
IP for SysReq
When the system request key is pressed, a Telnet “Interrupt Process” command is
generated. The “Interrupt Process” command is sent to the host in place of the
standard mechanism used to send the system request key press to a host using
Telnet.
BRK for Attn
When the attention key is pressed, a Telnet “Break” command is generated. This
command is sent to the host in place of the standard mechanism used to send the
attention key press to a host using Telnet.
LU Name Enabled
If enabled (set to ‘Y’), this parameter allows the 8525/8530 to negotiate a specific
device name for itself.
LU Name
The value assigned in this field is used when the “LU Name Enabled” parameter
(see above) is set to ‘Y’. The current terminal number is appended to the name to
generate a unique device name (for example, LUA00001).
236 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
Features – 3274/Telnet
Features
06
Clear Entry Fields N
Passthru Printing
N
AIAG Character
0
Barcode Character
0
Serial IO Character 0
Fixed Field Ovrhd
5
Enable Alarm
N
Command Region Up
0
Command Region Down 0
Command Region Left 0
Command Region Right 0
Range
Y/N
Y/N
0-255
0-255
0-255
0-80
Y/N
0-24
0-24
0-80
0-80
These parameters are identical to those described for 2392/Telnet. Refer to
&quot;Features – 2392/Telnet&quot; beginning on page 233.
FKEY0-7, FKEY8-15, FKEY16-23, FKEY24-31 And FKEY32-39
06
FKEY0-7
FKEY0
ENTER
FKEY1
F1
FKEY2
F2
FKEY3
F3
FKEY4
F4
FKEY5
F5
FKEY6
F6
FKEY7
F7
The sub-menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525/8530
function keys.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
237
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
5250/Telnet Emulation
Emulation
05
WEC
Remap Underline to
Intl EBCDIC
Nulls in Fields
Term Type
Virtual Dev Enable
Virtual Dev Prefix
Features
FKEY0-7
FKEY8-15
FKEY16-23
FKEY24-31
FKEY32-39
Advisory
None
N
Y
IBM-5251-11
N
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
&raquo;
Range
see text
see text
Y/N
Y/N
see text
Y/N
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
see text
WEC (Write Error Code)
This parameter determines the type of WEC used. If set to “advisory”, a TESS
advisory message is generated when the host sends a WEC command to the
8525/8530. Otherwise, if set to “screen text”, the 8525/8530 locks the keyboard and
displays the error message contained in the WEC command on the screen at the line
specified by the host. In this case, the 8525/8530 must be unlocked manually using
the function key mapped to RESET.
Remap Underline To
This parameter allows you to remap the underline cursor to: blink, bold, reverse or
none.
Intl EBCDIC
If this parameter is enabled (set to ‘Y’), the ‘international’ EBCDIC character set is
used, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters.
Nulls In Fields
Setting this parameter to ‘Y’ allows ‘null’ characters – e.g., hyphens (-) or periods
(.) – to fill in empty entry fields.
238 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Emulation
Term Type
The value assigned for this parameter – IBM-5555-001 or IBM-5251-11 – indicates
the type of terminal to report during the Telnet negotiations. It determines how the
AS/400 host treats the terminal. IBM-5251-11 is a standard 5250 terminal. IBM5555-001 is a Korean language terminal.
Virtual Dev Enabled
If enabled (set to ‘Y’), this parameter allows the 8525/8530 to negotiate a specific
device name for itself.
Virtual Dev Prefix
The prefix assigned in this field is used when the “Virtual Dev Enabled” parameter
(see above) is set to ‘Y’. The current terminal number is appended to the prefix to
generate a unique device name. You can assign up to 9 upper-case alphanumeric
characters in this field.
Features – 5250/Telnet
Features
06
Clear Entry Fields N
Passthru Printing
N
AIAG Character
0
Barcode Character
0
Serial IO Character 0
Fixed Field Ovrhd
5
Enable Alarm
N
Command Region Up
0
Command Region Down 0
Command Region Left 0
Command Region Right 0
Range
Y/N
Y/N
0-255
0-255
0-255
0-80
Y/N
0-24
0-24
0-80
0-80
These parameters are identical to those described for 2392/Telnet. Refer to
&quot;Features – 2392/Telnet&quot; beginning on page 233.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
239
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Console
FKEY0-7, FKEY8-15, FKEY16-23, FKEY24-31 And FKEY32-39
06
FKEY0-7
FKEY0
ENTER
FKEY1
F1
FKEY2
F2
FKEY3
F3
FKEY4
F4
FKEY5
F5
FKEY6
F6
FKEY7
F7
The sub-menus attached to these parameters allow you to map the 8525/8530
function keys.
6.20.3 Console
Choosing ‘Console’ displays an onscreen console interface. It allows you to
debug and monitor TekTerm. Typing “?” in the console screen for a list of active
tasks and commands.
6.20.4 Radio Statistics
Choosing ‘RadioStats’ displays information about currently configured ANSI and
TESS sessions. If neither of these sessions is configured, nothing is displayed on the
8525/8530 screen.
If an 802.IQ or Narrow Band connection is in use, the RadioStats screen will also
display 802.IQ and Narrow Band protocol information.
240 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Ports– Tether And Console
6.21 Ports– Tether And Console
03
Ports
Tether Port
Settings 1
Console Port
Settings 2
Console
&raquo;
Disabled
&raquo;
6.21.1 Tether And Console Port Peripheral Options
The “Tether Port” and “Console Port” options allow you to enable, disable and specify
the accessories attached to these ports. Both the Tether Port and the Console Port have
the same options. These are: Disabled, Serial, Console, Printer and Scan-See.
To scroll through the options for each port:
•
Press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key.
These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected.
•
Disabled – indicates that the serial port is not being used.
•
Serial – standard serial port.
•
Console – used to connect another PC to the 8525/8530. A communication
program is required so that communication can proceed between the
8525/8530 and the PC.
•
Printer – all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media
copy operations to the “primary port” are directed to this port.
•
Scan-See – TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the
Tether or Console port.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
241
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings
6.21.2 Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings
The parameters for the “Tether Port”, “Serial Port” and “Console Port” are identical.
Settings
04
Character Set &raquo;
Baud
9600
Data Bits
8
Parity
none
Stop Bits
1
Flow Ctrl
None
Buffer
512
Retries
3
Input Tmo
2
Output Tmo
5
Test
Y
Range
see text
see text for range of baud rates
6..8
none odd even mark space
1, 1.5, 2
None Software Hardware Both
1..2048
1..100
1..100
1..100
Y/N
Character Set
These menus define the character set for the 8525/8530 port.
Important:
When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a
right arrow character is used as a substitute.
Char Set
ISO
N&raquo;
IBM
Y&raquo;
DEC
N&raquo;
Misc.
N&raquo;
This menu contains all the character sets available with your Psion Teklogix
computer. In this menu, the “Y” or “N” are used to visually guide you to the selected
character set. For example, in the sample menu above, the “Y” next to IBM
indicates that a character set has been chosen from this group.
242 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings
Choosing A Character Set
To choose a character set:
•
Position the cursor on the appropriate item – for example, ISO – and press
[F1] to display the character set options.
•
To activate a character set, press the [RIGHT] or [LEFT] arrow key to set it
to “Y”.
Important:
If you choose a Chinese character set from the ‘Misc.’ menu and
a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the screen,
a shaded box character is used as a substitute.
If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is
used as a substitute.
Baud
This parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Allowable values include: 110
300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14.4kbps 19.2kbps 38.4kbps
57.6kbps 115.2kbps 128.0kbps or 256.0kbps.
Data Bits
This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port.
Possible values are: 6, 7, 8.
Parity
This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going
through the port. The options are: none, odd, even, mark and space.
Stop Bits
This parameter specifies the number of stop bits – 1, 1.5, 2 – used for
asynchronous communication.
Flow Control
This parameter selects the type of flow control used in your vehicle-mount
computer. The 8525/8530 can perform Software or Hardware handshaking, or you
can choose Both to enable both of these options.
The function of each mode is as follows:
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
243
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether, Serial And Console Port Parameter Settings
Enable: Used to input and output data.
Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.
Print:
Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and
XOFF are ignored.
Supports XON/XOFF or no handshaking.
Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored.
Supports no handshaking.
Note:
To enable the input and/or output, ‘serial in’ and/or ‘serial out’ must be
enabled in the TESS menu.
Buffer
The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by
the application for both input and output. The buffer controls the amount of data the
application can send to or receive from a serial device.
Retries
This parameter determines the number of times the 8525/8530 attempts to transmit a
byte from the serial port. If the count specified in this parameter is exceeded, the
transmission fails.
Input Tmo
This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the 8525/8530 waits before
passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks.
Output Tmo
The value assigned at this parameter determines the maximum number of
milliseconds that the application will wait for a ‘write’ sent to the port to succeed
before it is aborted. The ‘write’ may be one or several bytes in length.
Shared
The “Shared” parameter allows a port to be shared by multiple sessions within
TekTerm. If it is not enabled (set to “Y”), the first session to access the port has sole
use of it.
244 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters
Test
When this parameter is enabled (set to “Y”), data is output through the serial port to
make certain that it is operating appropriately.
6.21.3 Tether And Console Port Scan-See Parameters
When ‘Scan-See’ is specified as the peripheral for either the Tether or the Console
port, the parameters listed under the “Scan-See” sub-menu are used to tailor the
operation of this type of scanner. The other parameters listed in this menu –
“Character Set”, “Baud” and so on – are identical to those described beginning on
page 241.
Scan See
05
Character Set &raquo;
Baud
9600
Data Bits
8
Parity
none
Stop Bits
1
Retries
3
Input Tmo
2
Scan-See
&raquo;
6.21.3.1 Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
05
Range
Scan-See
Anchor Line
Anchor Column
Follow Cursor
Line Offset
Column Offset
Wraparound
Panning
Line Scrolling
Brightness
Arrows
Version
1
19
Y
0
0
N
Y
N
3
Bright
2
0...1
0...19
Y/N
-25...25
-80...80
Y/N
Y/N
Y/N
0 to 5
Bright Horz Vert
0...2
The Scan-See display is mapped to a specific area on the 8525/8530 screen – called
the viewport – and is continuously updated to reflect that portion of the screen. The
Scan-See viewport is defined as follows:
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
245
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Anchor Line/Anchor Column
A location on the Scan-See display – the anchor – is chosen as a reference point.
Line Offset/Column Offset
A predefined displacement – the offset – is added to the location of the 8525/8530
cursor to create a point – the pivot . This pivot is mapped to the anchor , and
whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See.
For example:
•
the anchor is chosen as (9,0) whereas “9” is the column and “0” is the line
(on the Scan-See display)
•
the offset is chosen as (4,2)
•
the cursor on the 8525/8530 is currently located at (7,5)
•
the pivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7)
•
and so the area displayed on the Scan-See will be:
(11–9,7–0) to (11–9+9,7–0+1) or (2,7) to (11,8). 1
1
These computations assume that “Wraparound” (described on page 248) is disabled
(set to “N”) and that “Follow Cursor” (described on page 248) is enabled (set to “Y”).
246 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . .
0
1
(0,0)
terminal cursor
2
3
4
(7,5)
+4
5
offs
6
anchor
(0,0)
(4
+2
(11, 7)
8
,2) et
+2
9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0
et
7
+4
offs
(9,0)
10
pivot =
Scan-See Display
terminal +
cursor
offset
...
11
1
Terminal Display
superimposing
the anchor on the pivot
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 . . .
0
1
(0,0)
2
anchor
3
4
5
6
(2,7 )
(11, 7)
pivot
7
(11, 8)
8
9
Scan-See Viewport
10
...
11
Note:
To enter negative values, press the “-” (minus) key and then, type the
number you want to use.
The [LEFT] arrow key can also be used to decrement the value assigned
to the parameter. Each time the [LEFT] arrow is pressed, the number is
decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of “–5”, start from
zero and press the left arrow key five times.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
247
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Follow Cursor
When the “Follow Cursor” parameter is disabled (set to “N”), the cursor is always
assumed to be located at the origin. Using the previous example:
•
the area displayed will be (4–9,2–0) to (4–9+9, 2–0+1), or, after clipping
values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3).
Wraparound
When “Wraparound” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as a
one-line by 20 column display, rather than 2 lines by 10 columns.
Panning
If “Panning” is disabled (set to “N”), the Scan-See viewport does not move when
the cursor moves one position to the right, and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See
display. However, the Scan-See display is updated to reflect the changes within that
viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the 8525/8530 display
changes without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to
coincide the pivot with the anchor.
Line Scrolling
When “Line Scrolling” is enabled (set to “Y”), the Scan-See display is treated as
two separate one line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the
previous value of the bottom line. In an application where the cursor skips from one
entry field to another, the field that the cursor just entered is displayed on the top
line, and the next field is displayed at the bottom.
Note:
When this feature is enabled (set to “Y”), the “Panning” option should be
disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke
Brightness
The “Brightness” parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only
has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees – scanners equipped with LED (light
emitting diode) displays.
248 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Sub-Menu – Mapping The Viewport
Arrows
The “Arrows” parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow
keys on the Scan-See keyboard:
Value
Function
“Bright”
Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness
“Horiz”
Arrow keys control “Column Offset”
“Vert”
Arrow keys control “Line Offset”
Table 6.5 “Arrow” Parameter Options
Note:
For “Horiz” and “Vert,” changing the offset will take affect only after the
8525/8530 display has been updated.
Version
Scan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain
firmware that implements a different communication protocol with the 8525/8530
than older units. The “Version” numbers represent the following unit versions:
Value
Scan-See Version
0
•First LED version – up to serial number 1594080275; these are
encased in grey plastic.
1
•Model 7000 LED units – versions after the serial number above; these
are also encased in grey plastic.
2
•Metrologic 7000M LCD units; these are encased in grey plastic.
•Psion Teklogix 7000M LCD units; these are encased in black plastic.
Table 6.6 Scan-See Versions
Note:
To interface the 8525/8530 to the Scan-See units with older firmware
(serial number lower than 1594120224), set “Parity = space”;
all other parameters are identical to the newer firmware.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
249
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
Scan-See Keyboard Mapping
6.21.3.2 Scan-See Keyboard Mapping
•
Digits (0-9) are passed verbatim
•
The CLR key forces a sign-on message and display refresh. This only
occurs when CLR is pressed and the CLR key on the display is pressed,
then released.
•
The three F-keys are mapped to F1, F2 and F3, respectively.
•
The ENT key is mapped to the carriage-return (‘\r’) character.
•
The two arrow keys are handled locally, and control the brightness, and the
line and column offsets, as described on page 248.
•
Bar-code data is stripped off any identifying headers (symbology, etc.)
and passed verbatim.
The Scan-See is capable of displaying only a subset of the default PC-8 ASCII
character set. Any characters that cannot be displayed are currently translated to ‘.’.
6.22 Network
03
Network
Ctrl Panel
802.IQv2
&raquo;
&raquo;
6.22.1 Network Ctrl Panel Settings
This option displays a Windows CE .NET screen where you can set up your radio,
launch an existing network connection or create a new connection.
Figure 6.12 Network Settings
250 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
802.IQ v2
Important:
Follow the steps outlined in “Configuring An IEEE 802.11
Radio” on page 19 for details about configuring your radio.
6.22.2 802.IQ v2
Important:
For setup information about 802.IQ v2, refer to the “9400 and
9450 Network Controllers User Manual” and/or the “9150
Wireless Gateway User Manual”.
Range
04
802.IQ v2
Port
8888
see text
More Parameters &raquo;
see text
Port
“Port” specifies the UDP port used by 802IQ v2. The default value is 8888. Keep in
mind that the value assigned here must match the value set at the network controller.
Note:
When using 802.IQ v2, make certain that the 8525/8530 “Net Mask”
matches the network controller net mask.
More Parameters
Important:
The 802.IQ radio items listed in this menu are only available to
Psion Teklogix personnel.
05
802.IQ v2 Parameters
Auto Radio Addr
Y
Radio Address
0
Initial RTT
100
Range
Y/N
1 to 3840
500...5000
Auto Radio Addr
If this parameter is set to “Y”, the 8525/8530 requests an automatically assigned
radio address.
Note:
If ‘Auto Radio Addr’ is enabled (set to “Y”), any value assigned to the ‘Radio
Address’ parameter is ignored.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
251
Chapter 6: Tekterm Application
802.IQ v2
Radio Address
Important:
“Radio Address” only takes effect when “Cellular” is
enabled (set to “Y”).
The value entered in the “Radio address” parameter is used to identify the 8525/8530
vehicle-mount over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each
8525/8530.
Initial RTT (Round Trip Time)
Round trip time is the elapsed time between an 8525/8530 vehicle-mount computer
transmission and an access point acknowledgement. Each 8525/8530 continuously
adjusts the acceptable round trip time, calculating the average elapsed time over a
number of transmissions. If an acknowledgement takes longer to receive than the
average round trip time calculated, the 8525/8530 will send the transmission again.
Because 8525/8530s cannot calculate an average round trip time without a number
of transmissions, a starting point or “Initial Round Trip Time” is required. The 8525
uses the time assigned to the “Initial RTT” parameter as a starting value for round
trip calculations. Once the 8525 begins transmitting and receiving data, this value
will be adjusted to reflect the actual average round trip time between transmissions
and acknowledgements.
252 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
PERIPHERAL DEVICES &amp; ACCESSORIES
7
7.1 External Bar Code Readers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners . . . . . . 255
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.2 Bluetooth Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
7.3 GPS Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7.4 8525/8530 Mounting Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
7.4.1 8525/8530 Mounting Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . 258
7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
7.4.4 Installing The Swivel Mount. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.4.5 8530 Keyboard Mounting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.4.5.1 Keyboard L-Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
7.4.5.2 Keyboard Mounting Cradle And Quick-Release . . . . . . . . 264
7.4.5.3 Keyboard RAM Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.4.6 Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.4.7 8525/8530 Installation In High Voltage Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . 267
7.4.8 8525/8530 Installation In Vehicles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
7.4.9 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525/8530 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
253
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
External Bar Code Readers
7.1 External Bar Code Readers
7.1.1 PowerScan™ Standard, LR and XLR Bar Code Scanners
The 8525/8530 supports Psion Teklogix’ PowerScan™ industrial bar code scanner
with standard, long range and extra long range options.
To connect this scanner to the 8525/8530, attach the device to the tether port. Before
using the bar code reader, you may need to change some parameters. For details,
review “Scanner Properties Setup” beginning on page 128.
7.1.2 Entering Data With The Bar Code Reader
Note:
For helpful scanning tips, refer to “Scanning Techniques” on page 44.
When a label is scanned successfully, the 8525/8530 will beep if configured
appropriately and the scan LED will flash. Occasionally, the bar code labels are
poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read properly. In this case, use the
keyboard to enter data from the label.
7.2 Bluetooth Peripherals
If the 8525/8530 is equipped with a Bluetooth radio, it is possible to communicate
with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals, including GSM/GPRS handsets, scanners,
printers, and so on. The range of the Bluetooth radio in the 8525/8530 is limited to
between 2 and 5 meters.
Psion Teklogix provides built-in support for the Bluetooth peripherals listed below.
•
•
GSM/GPRS tri-band universal handset
Bluetooth printer
Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802.11b radios both operate in the 2.4GHz
band. Although the 8525/8530 includes features to minimize interference,
performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously.
Typically, when both radios operate in the 8525/8530 at the same time, they cannot
transmit simultaneously – this has a negative impact on overall system throughput.
To minimize the impact on the backbone 802.11b network, Psion Teklogix
recommends using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates (such as
printers and scanners).
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
255
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
GPS Unit
Bluetooth peripherals are configured using the Bluetooth control panel applet. Refer to
“Bluetooth Setup” on page 108 for information about setting up your Bluetooth
devices for communication. In addition, review the manual shipped with your
Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the 8525/8530 host.
7.3 GPS Unit
The 8525/8530 can support an optional GPS unit. This unit, a Garmin GPS 35HVS
(TLX PN 30969), is a complete GPS receiver and antenna contained in a small,
water resistant package. The Garmin GPS 35HVS can track up to 12 satellites at a
time, while providing fast time-to-first-fix and one second navigation updates.
The GPS unit was designed to be used in conjunction with the Psion Teklogix
Powered Sled (Model 7937B), the Lithium Ion Battery Pack (PN 20605-003) and
the Psion Teklogix Port Replicator (TLX PN 21655). The GPS unit plugs directly
into the Port Replicator which supplies the GPS unit with power (from the Powered
Sled supply) and connects the data lines to the 8525/8530.
The GPS unit should be mounted with a clear, unobstructed view of the GPS satellites.
For optimal performance, the GPS unit should be mounted in an area that provides
exposure to as large a swath of unobstructed sky as possible – a vehicle roof is an
excellent choice.
Important:
Keep in mind that some windows have thermal and/or UV filter or
tint coatings that may shield satellite signals from the GPS
receiver.
Psion Teklogix provides four types of Garmin mounting brackets to secure your
GPS unit in position.
7.4 8525/8530 Mounting Accessories
Note:
Because the 8530 has a separate keyboard, keyboard mounting equipment
is available for this model.
The 8525 and 8530 are secured using the same mounting equipment. There are three
mounting options for the 8525/8530:
•
•
•
Quick-Release Mount, includes two adaptor plates, quick release and cradle
mount (along with necessary hardware) – Kit PN 1008424
Dual Ball and Socket Mount
Swivel Mount
256 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
8525/8530 Mounting Recommendations
7.4.1 8525/8530 Mounting Recommendations
Warnings:
Before mounting an 8525/8530 in a vehicle, there are a number of
operator safety issues that require careful attention. An improperly
mounted 8525/8530 may result in one or more of the following:
operator injury, operator visibility obstruction, operator distraction
and/or poor ease of egress for the operator. Psion Teklogix strongly
recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the
vehicle manufacturer.
Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration, especially for separately tethered scanners and other devices
with loose cables. If you are unable to obtain suitable advice,
contact Psion Teklogix for assistance (see &quot;Appendix A: Support
Services and Worldwide Offices&quot; at the end of this document). Note
also that for better protection, the equipment should be mounted
inside the vehicle roll cage.
Use of the Powered Fork Lift Cradle while charging the fork truck
battery is prohibited.
Important Safeguards
•
To avoid possible injury, this device must be properly secured when in a
moving vehicle.
•
Keep this device away from magnetic fields.
•
Do not place the computer near a television or radio receiver.
•
Do not disassemble your 8525/8530 computer—there are no user-serviceable parts inside.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
257
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate
7.4.2 Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate
Mounting Kit PN 1008424
Cradle Mounting Plate and Quick Release
PN 18457 and PN 17529
Adaptor Plate PN 1008444
Adaptor Plate
Figure 7.1 Quick Release Mount Installed
First, the 8525/8530 must be attached to the cradle (Figure 7.2 on page 259). To
do this:
•
Place the terminal in the cradle so that the ports face away from the quick
release fasteners.
258 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate
•
Match the side screw holes on the 8525/8530 with the appropriate pairs
of holes on the cradle and screw them together. The choice of holes
determines the angle at which the terminal tilts.
Screw Holes
29.8 c.4m5 in.
11
Fron Tabs
t
Quick Release
Fasteners
5.25 cm
2 in.
Bac
k
cm
.75 n.
10 .25 i
4
Figure 7.2 Mounting Cradle And Quick Release
Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate
Next, the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle. The cradle
mounting plate shown in Figure 7.3 holds the 8525/8530 and cradle in place.
•
Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1/4&quot; holes.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
259
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Installing The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate
Note:
The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20.
Post
Fro
nt
25.4 cm10.0 in.
Tab
Guides
Ba
ck
cm
13 in.
5
Figure 7.3 The Cradle Mounting Plate
Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate
Next, the 8525/8530 and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate.
•
•
Align the tabs on the front of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting
plate and push the cradle back and down.
Slide the fasteners on the back of the cradle until they snap to the posts on
the mounting plate.
Warning:
Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are
not locked.
260 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount
7.4.3 Installing The Dual Ball And Socket Mount
Standard Cradle
(PN 1008442)
RAM Mount
Standard RAM Ball Ends
(Vesa Plate also available)
Figure 7.4 Dual Ball And Socket Mount
With the standard RAM ball end or vesa plate(s) installed on the RAM mount:
•
•
Attach the RAM mount to a standard cradle (PN 1008442) using the hardware included with your kit.
Attach the other end of the mount to almost any surface. The ball
design allows both ends of the RAM mount to be angled to suit the
operator's needs.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
261
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Installing The Swivel Mount
7.4.4 Installing The Swivel Mount
Swivel Mounting Kit PN 1008452
Standard Mount (not part of kit)
PN 1008426
Ball Mount
Swivel Block (1)
Swivel Block (2)
Figure 7.5 8525/8530 Swivel Mount
This mounting option is designed to allow the vehicle-mount to be angled to suit the
operator's needs.
•
•
•
Attach the cradle (PN 1008426) to the ball mount.
Position the ball mount within the first swivel block.
The second swivel block holds the ball mount in place – position the second
swivel block over the ball mount, and secure it with 3 screws.
7.4.5 8530 Keyboard Mounting Options
Psion Teklogix offers a variety of mounting options for the 8530 external keyboard.
Many of the mounting options can be combined to better suite your needs.
262 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Keyboard L-Bracket
7.4.5.1
Keyboard L-Bracket
Standard Cradle
PN 1008442
Keyboard L-Bracket
PN 1008456
Figure 7.6 Keyboard L-Bracket And Standard Cradle
The keyboard L-bracket was designed to allow you to secure the 8530 and the
external keyboard as a single unit.
•
•
•
Note:
Attach the standard cradle to the L-bracket using the four screws provided.
Attach the 8530 to the cradle, securing it in place with four screws.
Attach the keyboard to the base of the L-bracket using the four
screws provided.
Keep in mind that L-bracket can be secured on a variety of other
mounting options such as a RAM mount.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
263
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Keyboard Mounting Cradle And Quick-Release
Keyboard
8530 Vehicle-Mount
Keyboard
L-Bracket
Standard Cradle
Figure 7.7 8530 And Keyboard Mounted On L-Bracket
7.4.5.2
Keyboard Mounting Cradle And Quick-Release
Mounting Kit PN 1008755
Keyboard Quick-Release
PN 1008449
Keyboard Mounting Plate
PN 1008446
Figure 7.8 Keyboard Mounting Plate And Quick-Release
264 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Keyboard Mounting Cradle And Quick-Release
•
•
Use the four screws provided to secure the keyboard to the mounting plate
(PN 1008446).
Insert the screws into the side of the quick-release to secure the mounting
cradle to the quick-release plate (PN 1008449).
You can combine the keyboard mounting plate (PN 1008446) with other mounting
equipment such as that illustrated in the diagram below.
Mounting Plate PN 1008446
Mounting Cradle PN 18457
Cradle Mounting Plate
PN 17529
Figure 7.9 Alternative Keyboard Mounting Option
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
265
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Keyboard RAM Mount
7.4.5.3
Keyboard RAM Mount
RAM Mount Kit PN 1008447
Vesa Plate
PN 9001934
RAM Mount
PN 1008661
RAM Ball End
PN 9001804
Figure 7.10 Keyboard RAM Mount
You can install two vesa plates or one each of a vesa plate and a RAM ball end to the
RAM mount.
With the keyboard RAM ball end or vesa plate(s) installed on the RAM mount:
•
•
Attach the RAM mount to a standard cradle (PN 1008442) using the hardware included with your kit.
Attach the other end of the mount to almost any surface. The ball
design allows both ends of the RAM mount to be angled to suit the
operator's needs.
7.4.6 Wiring Guidelines
Before installing the cables between the computer and other devices, consider
the following:
•
Ensure the vehicle body and underlying wiring is not damaged while drilling mounting holes.
266 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
8525/8530 Installation In High Voltage Vehicles
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note:
Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage.
Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal.
Use plastic straps and tie-downs to secure cables and connectors in their
desired location, away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled.
Keep the cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other
potential hazards.
Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that
may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle.
Leave enough slack on the cables so that the computer can be removed
easily for maintenance.
Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage of the vehicle.
7.4.7 8525/8530 Installation In High Voltage Vehicles
Warning:
Voltages exceeding 60VDC are considered hazardous. For
8525/8530 installations on vehicles with batteries above this voltage, ensure the 8525/8530 power connector is mounted in a secure
location out of the vehicle operator’s reach.
Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles, it is necessary to ensure
that the unit’s power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator,
and is not exposed to water or other liquids. To accomplish this:
•
•
•
Ensure the power connector is installed in a dry location on the vehicle,
away from the vehicle operator’s reach (perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a
sealed housing).
Cover the power connector with waterproof heat shrink material.
Wrap the connector securely with waterproof electrical tape in an area out
of the vehicle operators reach.
All other installation requirements outlined in this document should also be
followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the
8525/8530 vehicle-mount.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
267
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
8525/8530 Installation In Vehicles
7.4.8 8525/8530 Installation In Vehicles
Note:
The metal chassis of the 8525/8530 is equipped with a ground lug
(located on the underside of the 8525/8530, beside the cable management
bar) to provide an additional ground to the vehicle, if desired. The
grounding strap must connect from the ground stud on the 8525/8530 to a
solid, reliable contact point on the main portion of the vehicle chassis. It
must not be connected to battery negative or a terminal block.
As with other vehicle cables, the routing of the ground strap should be carefully
considered to ensure it does not pose a hazard to the operator or the safe operation of
the vehicle. If necessary, secure the ground strap with cable ties or some other
mechanical means to prevent loops or loose lengths of wire from catching on
stationary items when the vehicle is in motion.
7.4.9 Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525/8530
Warning:
The 8525/8530 accepts DC power sources between 10V
and 90VDC nom.
Applying a voltage above 90VDC or reversing polarity may
result in permanent damage to the 8525/8530 and will void the
product warranty.
A 1.8 meter (6 ft.) extension power cable (PN 13985-002 std or –001 display off) is
supplied with your 8525/8530. This cable should be wired to a filtered, fused
(maximum 10A) accessory supply on the vehicle. The 8525/8530 draws no more
than 8A (less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V). Any additional wiring
(minimum 18 gauge), connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 90
VDC, 10A.
When connecting PN 13985-001 (display-off version), ensure that the screen
blanking wires (clearly labelled) and the power wires (red/black leads) are reliably
secured away from each other, or are separated with reliably secured certified
insulation. Minimum 2.8mm distance, or 0.4mm distance through insulation is
required for the separation.
The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply. The black
lead connects to the negative supply – this should be connected to a proper terminal
block and not to the vehicle body. The 8525/8530 is fully isolated and can be used
with both negative and positive chassis vehicles.
268 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 7: Peripheral Devices &amp; Accessories
Wiring Vehicle Power To The 8525/8530
You may have the option of connecting power before or after the ‘key’ switch. It is
preferable to wire the 8525/8530 after the key switch – that is, the 8525/8530 cannot
be switched on without turning the vehicle key on. However, if the operator
switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift, it may make more
sense to wire the 8525/8530 before the switch.
Keep in mind that the 8525/8530 will continue to operate with or without vehicle
power as long as its back up battery has sufficient charge.
If an unfused power source must be used, a fuse assembly (PN 19440) must be
added to the extension power cable (the fuse and instructions are supplied with the
cable). Use only a 10A slow blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly. The fuse
assembly must be located as close as practical to the DC supply, and shall connect to
the positive side of the DC supply.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
269
8
SPECIFICATIONS
8.1 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications. . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Radio Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 802.11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) .
8.2.3 802.11a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release) .
8.2.4 RA1001 - Narrow Band Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.5 Bluetooth Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Bar Code Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3.1 External Scanners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 External Scanner Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs . . . . . .
8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 Internal Lithium-Ion Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
273
275
275
275
275
276
276
276
276
277
277
279
280
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
271
Chapter 8: Specifications
8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications
Note:
Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change
without notice.
8.1 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications
Size
•
•
8525:279mm W x 117mm H x 279mm L (11&quot; W x 4 5/8&quot; H x 11&quot; L)
8530:Terminal – 298mm W x 101mm H x 267mm (11 3/4&quot; W x 4&quot; H x 10 1/2&quot; L)
Keyboard – 292mm W x 38mm x 127mm L (11 1/2&quot; W x 1 1/2&quot; H x 5&quot; L)
Weight
Approximately 4.3 kg (9.5 lbs)
8530 keyboard: approximately .91 kg (2 lbs)
Operating System
Windows CE .NET 4.2
Programming Environment
•
•
•
•
HTML, XML
Windows CE .NET SDK
Java, Visual C++
Standard protocol APIs
- Windows sockets (WinCE)
Processor And Memory
•
•
•
•
Power
•
•
•
•
•
400MHz ARM RISC CPU (400 MIPS)
32KB instruction/32KB data cache
on-board RAM: 128 MBytes SDRAM
on-board ROM: 64 MBytes FLASH
Internal power supply 10-90 VDC designed for forklift power
12.6 V Li-Ion standard battery for brown-out
Advanced Smart Battery
Built-in fast charger
1 week real-time clock backup
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
273
Chapter 8: Specifications
8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer Specifications
External Ports
•
•
•
•
One Tether port with:
- one RS232 serial port (decoded scanner, printer)
- undecoded scanner port
- USB host port
One Port with:
- DB9 plug RS232
One Port with: High density socket (for service use only)
- one RS232 serial comm. port
- 1 USB device port
- 2 USB host ports
Proprietary Keyboard port for 8530 only
Environmental
Standard Temperature Unit
Operating Temperature Range
Storage Temperature
Rain And Dust Resistance
Humidity
3 axis Vibration
3 axis Shock
Freezer Unit
Temperature Range
Storage Temperature
Rain And Dust Resistance
Humidity
3 axis Vibration
3 axis Shock
Approvals
Safety
EMC
-20&deg; C to 50&deg; C (-4&deg; F to 122&deg; F)
-35&deg; C to 70&deg; C (-31&deg; F to 158&deg; F)
IEC 529, classification IP66.
5% - 95% RH non-condensing
1.5g RMS PSD (4 - 500 Hz)
30g 11ms saw tooth.
-30&deg; C to 60&deg; C (-22&deg; F to 140&deg; F)
-35&deg; C to 70&deg; C (-31&deg; F to 158&deg; F)
IEC 529, classification IP66.
5% - 95% RH condensing
1.5g RMS PSD (4 - 500 Hz)
30g 11ms saw tooth.
UL 60950-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 60950-1
LVD
EN 60950-1
FCC Part 15 Class B
- Complies with European R &amp; TTE Directive.
* Note this product will carry the CE Mark.
274 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
Radio Specifications
8.2 Radio Specifications
8.2.1 802.11b Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
Compact Flash form factor
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Channels
Range
Rx Sensitivity
Data Rates
32 mW
2.400-2.4835
11 or 13 channels
50-115m
-93dBm @ 1 Mbps (lower/most sensitive)
-82 dBm @ 11Mbps (higher/least sensitive)
1,2,5.5 and 11 Mbps auto fallback
8.2.2 802.11g Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release)
Compact Flash form factor
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Channels
Range
RX Sensitivity
Data Rates
32mW max
2.400-2.4835
1 to 13
30-115m
-86dBm @ 6Mbps
54,48,36,34,18,12,9,6Mbps auto fallback
8.2.3 802.11a Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (for future release)
Compact Flash or PC Card form factor
Transmit Power
40mW max
Frequency Range
5.15-5.35GHz, 5.47-5.85GHz
Channels
1 to 20
Range
50-115m
Rx Sensitivity
-87dBm @ 6Mbps
Data Rates
54, 48, 36, 24, 18, 1,2 9 and 6 Mbps auto fallback
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
275
Chapter 8: Specifications
RA1001 - Narrow Band Radio
8.2.4 RA1001 - Narrow Band Radio
Psion Teklogix Proprietary Narrowband Modulation (2/4 level FSK)
Type III PC Card Form Factor
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
Rx Sensitivity
Data Rates
1W or 0.5W
403-422 MHz, 419-435 MHz, 435-451
MHz,
450-470 MHz, 464-480 MHz, 480-496
MHz,
496-512 MHz
&lt; -110 dBm @ 19.2 kbps (4 level FSK)
4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps
8.2.5 Bluetooth Radio
SDI/O form factor
Transmit Power
Frequency Range
RX Sensitivity
Data Rate
0dBm max, -9dBm min
2.400-2.4835
-72dBm typ, -75dBm max
784 kbps
8.3 Bar Code Scanning
Scanner Types
Non-Decoded Codes Supported
Decoded Codes Supported
Code Discrimination
Decoded and non-decoded.
Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8,
EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar,
Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5,
MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5.
Dependent on external scanner choice.
Automatic for all selected codes, NonDecoded input. Decoded input is external
scanner dependent.
8.3.1 External Scanners
Supported Types
Interface
Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only.
Via tether port.
276 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
External Scanner Specifications
8.4 External Scanner Specifications
8.4.1 PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs
Communication
Undecoded
Standard and Intermec-compatible.
Mechanical
Dimensions
Weight
6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)
Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)
Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)
Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)
Max working: 183 cm (72 in)
Cable lengths
Electrical
Operating voltage
Operating current - nominal
4 VDC to 14 VDC
Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC
Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC
Idling current - low power mode &lt; 50 &micro;A @ 5 VDC
Optical
Light source
Scan System
Rate
Depth of field - Long Range
Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode
(VLD)
Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism
35 scans/sec nominal
Paper Labels (decoded)
7.5 mil6 to 10 in (15 to 25 cm)
10 mil 5 to 20 in (13 to 51 cm)
15 mil 5 to 32 in (13 to 81 cm)
20 mil 5 to 48 in (15 to 122 cm)
40 mil 8 to 85 in (20 to 216 cm)
55 mil 15 to 108 in (38 to 274 cm)
Reflective Labels (decoded)
40 mil 22 to 100 in (56 to 254 cm)
55 mil 30 to 104 in (76 to 366 cm)
70 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)
100 mil45 to 264 in (114 to 671 cm)
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
277
Chapter 8: Specifications
PowerScan™ LR and XLR Industrial Scanner Specs
Depth of Field-Extra Long
Range
Paper Labels (decoded)
15 mil 28 to 60 in (71 to 152 cm)
20 mil 28 to 72 in (71 to 182 cm)
40 mil 28 to 144 in (71 to 144 cm)
55 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457)
Reflective Labels (decoded)
40 mil 40 to 180 in (102 to 457 cm)
70 mil 80 to 300 in (2032 to 762 cm)
100 mil80 to 432 in (203 to 1097 cm)
Print Contrast Ratio
Pitch
Skew
Ambient Light Immunity
25% minimum
&plusmn; 65&deg;
&plusmn; 55&deg;
Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.
Environmental
Temperature Rating
Humidity
Shock (at 23&deg; C)
Vibration
Water and Dust
Operating: -22&deg; to 122&deg; F (-30&deg; to 50&deg; C)
Storage: -40&deg; to 158&deg; F (-40&deg; to 70&deg; C)
5 to 95% NC
Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.
Meets MIL-STD-810E
IEC529 rating IP54DW
Decoding Capabilities
Auto-discriminates between:
UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13
(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)
Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39, Interleaved
2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,
Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,
Safety/Regulatory
Electrical
Emissions
Laser Classification
Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL
Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B
BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;
VCCI-B
CDRH Class 2;IEC60825 Class 2
278 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Chapter 8: Specifications
PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs
8.4.2 PowerScan™ Standard Range Scanner Specs
Communication
Undecoded
Standard and Intermec-compatible.
Mechanical
Dimensions
Weight
6.9 x 11.2 x 18.3 cm (2.7 x 4.4 x 7.2 in)
Scanner - 280 g (9.9 ozs)
Cable (82.3 cm 32 in) - 176 g (6.2 ozs)
Collapsed: 81 cm (32 in)
Max working: 183 cm (72 in)
Cable lengths
Optical
Light source
Scan System
Rate
Depth of field - Standard
Print Contrast Ratio
Pitch
Skew
Ambient Light Immunity
Extra bright 650 nm Visible Laser Diode
(VLD)
Frictionless lifetime flexure mechanism
35 scans/sec nominal
Paper Labels (decoded)
7.5 mil 3.0
to 6 in (9 to 15 cm)
10 mil 1.5
to 15 in (4 to 38 cm)
15 mil 1.0
to 25 in (2.5 to 64 cm)
20 mil 1.0
to 35 in (2.5 to 89 cm)
(paper) 55 mil 6.0 to
60 in
(15 to 152 cm)
High Density (decoded)
3 mil 1.0
to 2 in (2.5 to 5.1 cm)
4 mil 1.0
to 3 in (2.5 to 8 cm)
5 mil 0.8
to 3.8 in (2 to 10 cm)
7.5 mil 0.6
to 4.5 in (1.5 to 11 cm)
10 mil 0.2
to 5.5 in (0.5 to 14 cm)
25% minimum
&plusmn; 65&deg;
&plusmn; 55&deg;
Artificial light: 1200 ft. candles.
Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
279
Chapter 8: Specifications
Internal Lithium-Ion Battery
Electrical
Operating voltage
Operating current - nominal
4 VDC to 14 VDC
Undecoded: 75 mA @ 5 VDC
Decoded: 100 mA @ 5 VDC
Idling current - low power mode &lt; 50 &micro;A @ 5 VDC
Environmental
Temperature Rating
Humidity
Shock (at 23&deg; C)
Vibration
Water and Dust
Operating: -22&deg; to 122&deg; F (-30&deg; to 50&deg; C)
Storage: -40&deg; to 158&deg; F (-40&deg; to 70&deg; C)
5 to 95% NC
Withstands multiple 6 foot drops to concrete.
Meets MIL-STD-810E
IEC529 rating IP54DW
Decoding Capabilities
Auto-discriminates between:
UPC A, E/EAN8, 13/JAN8, 13
(P2/P5, Code 128 EAN add-ons)
Code 128, MSI/Plessey, Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5, Code 39 Full Ascii,
Standard 2 of 5, Code 93, Codabar,
Safety/Regulatory
Electrical
Emissions
Laser Classification
Complies to: Gost R; TUV; UL; cUL
Complies to: FCC-A;EN55022-B
BCIQCNS13438; AS/NZS3548;
VCCI-B
CDRH Class 2;IEC60825 Class 2
8.5 Internal Lithium-Ion Battery
Not user accessible.
Technology
12.6V Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) backup battery
280 Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
A
SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES
Psion Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers worldwide. These services include technical support and product repairs.
A.1 Technical Support
Technical Support for Mobile Computing Products is provided via e-mail through
the Psion Teklogix customer and partner extranets. To reach the website, go to
www.psionteklogix.com and click on the appropriate Teknet link on the home page.
Then click on the “Log-in” button or the “Register” button, depending on whether
you have previously registered for Teknet. Once you have logged in, search for the
“Support Request Form”.
A.2 Product Repairs
International
For technical support outside of Canada or the U.S.A., please contact your local
Psion Teklogix office listed on our worldwide website:
http://www.psionteklogix.com
Click on the heading labelled ‘Contacts’ to choose a Psion Teklogix technical
support representative closest to you.
Canada/U.S.A
Canadian and U.S. customers can receive access to repair services, by calling the
toll-free number below, or via our secure website (see Technical Support, above).
Note:
Customers calling the toll-free number should have their Psion Teklogix
customer number or trouble ticket number available.
Voice:
1 800 387-8898 (press option ‘2’)
Fax:
1 905 812-6304
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
A-1
A.3 Worldwide Offices
COMPANY HEADQUARTERS
AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE
NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS
AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRE
Psion Teklogix Inc.
2100 Meadowvale Boulevard
Mississauga
Ontario
Canada L5N 7J9
Psion Teklogix Corp.
1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard
Suite 500
Erlanger, Kentucky
USA 41018
Tel:
Fax:
Tel:
Fax:
+1 905 813 9900
+1 905 812 6300
Email: [email protected]
+1 859 371 6006
+1 859 371 6422
Email: [email protected]
INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES (see also www.psionteklogix.com)
Psion Teklogix S.A.
La Duranne
135 Rue Rene Descartes
BP 421000
13591 Aix-En-Provence
Cedex 3; France
Tel:
+33 4 42 90 88 09
Fax:
+33 4 42 90 88 88
E-mail: [email protected]
A-2
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
B
PORT PINOUTS
B.1 Tether Port Pinout
The tether port connector incorporates multiplexed undecoded scanner, decoded
scanner, RS232 serial, and USB interfaces. In order for it to operate, a special wiring
scheme is needed. If you need to create cables for the tether port, contact Psion Teklogix and request an instruction sheet for tether port termination.
Important:
Do not attempt to interface with the tether connector without
direction from a qualified Psion Teklogix technician. Doing so
may cause damage to the 8525 and/or the tethered device.
B.2 RS232 Port Pinout
Pin
No.
Description
1
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
2
RXD (Receive Data)
3
TXD (Transmit Data)
4
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
5
GND (Signal Ground)
6
DSR (Data Set Ready)
7
RTS (Ready To Send)
8
CTS (Clear to Send)
* 9 5V POWER *
* CAUTION: If enabled (software configurable), 5V power will appear on this line,
which may be the Ring Indicator line on some devices such as modems.
1/2 Amp Max.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
B-1
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout
B.3 DB-26 Auxiliary Port Pinout
Pin
No.
Signal And Description
1
EXT_5V_SW – Configurable 5V power for External devices (such as USB).
1/2 Amp max.
2
EXT_5V_SW – Same as above.
3
MIC_IN – Microphone input.
4
MIC_GND – Microphone signal ground.
5
Speaker + (positive).
6
Speaker - (negative).
7
GND - Signal Ground
8
USB_HOST_PORT_4_PLUS - for connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers.
9
USB_HOST_PORT_4_PLUS - for connecting external devices such as keyboards, mice, printers.
10 GND - Signal Ground.
11 USB_DEVICE_PLUS – For connections to USB Hosts such as computers.
12 USB_DEVICE_NEGATIVE – For connections to USB Hosts such as computers.
13 GND - Signal Ground.
14
USB_HOST_PORT_3_PLUS – For connecting external devices such as
keyboards, mice, printers.
15 USB_HOST_PORT_3_NEGATIVE – For connecting external devices such
as keyboards, mice, printers.
16
GND – Signal Ground
17 CONSOLE_RXD – Console Port (RS-232) Receive Data ** Internal use
only.
18
CONSOLE_TXD – Console Port (RS-232) Transmit Data ** Internal use
only.
19 GND – Signal Ground
B-2
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
External Keyboard–High Density DB-26 (8530 Only)
Pin
No.
Signal And Description
20 CONSOLE_TXD_SEL – Transmit data Select - selects whether the PCON
or PXA-255 (CPU) is sending data out the CONSOLE_TXD pin. **Internal
use only.
21 MOTION DETECT – Alternate input- blanks the screen for the period that
this pin is grounded -(usually implemented via extra wires in the Unit input
Power cable.
22 AUXILIARY_ID – External device Identity Input Pin.
23 NO CONNECT.
24 PCON_PROGRAM – Input – used to program Peripheral Controller
**Internal use only.
25 NO CONNECT.
26 NO CONNECT.
B.4 External Keyboard–High Density DB-26 (8530 Only)
Signal
#
Function
Signal
Type
1
32 Khz Clock +
5V diff
2
32 Khz Clock -
5V diff
3
Keyboard Interrupt +
5V diff
4
Keyboard Interrupt -
5V diff
5
Ground
Power
6
I2C Serial Clock
7
Ground
8
I2C Serial Data
9
5V
Power
10
5V Switched
Power
11
3V3 Standby
Power
Notes
I2C serial data
interface
Power
I2C serial data
interface
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
B-3
Appendix B: Port Pinouts
External Keyboard–High Density DB-26 (8530 Only)
Signal
#
B-4
Function
Signal
Type
Notes
12
3V3 Switched
Power
13
EL Command
14
Ground
Power
15
Ground
Power
16
Ground
Power
17
Ground
Power
18
No connect
19
System Power
15V
Heater Power
20
System Power
15V
Heater Power
21
No connect
22
Ground
Power
23
Ground
Power
24
No Connect
25
Keyboard Detect IN
3V3
Loop-back signal to
detect keyboard
installed
26
Keyboard Detect Out
3V3
Loop-back signal to
detect keyboard
installed
Serial data to EL
backlight controller
Not used
Not used
Not used
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
APPENDIX
C
USB SETUP APPLICATION
C.1 USB Setup
The USB Setup application (PN 1000997) is used to update a Windows PC so that it
can connect to a Psion Teklogix 8525.
System Requirements
•
•
Windows&reg; 2000 or XP
ActiveSync 3.1 or later
The two driver classes that control USB communication are usbstor (for communication with a device running BooSt) and wceusbsh (for communication
through ActiveSync with a device running Windows CE .NET). These drivers must
be updated with 8525-specific information so that the 8525 can be recognized by
your PC.
The install program:
• updates copies of the device installation scripts usbstor.inf and
wceusbsh.inf with Psion Teklogix-specific information,
• sets up a USB connection between the PC and the 8525, and
• installs the 8525 as a device on your PC. This may require notifying the
PC OS that the device should be reinstalled and then reconnecting the
USB device.
C.1.1 Launching The Application
The log file is initialized and the program introduction is written to it.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
C-1
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf
C.1.2 Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf
1. Welcome Dialog Box:
You can click on the [Back] and [Next] buttons to navigate between the
pre-install windows. At any time during the pre-installation process,
you can tap on [Cancel] to exit the program.
•
•
Shut down all other software programs – especially ActiveSync – to avoid a
restart request during installation.
Tap on the [Next] button.
The program checks that ActiveSync is installed and that it is a supported
version – 3.1 or later. If the version installed on your PC is not supported,
you’ll need to exit the USB Setup application, and install a later version of
ActiveSync.
2. Device Driver INF File Selection Dialog Box:
This dialog box allows you to choose the paths of the appropriate inf
files. Default file paths are provided in this dialog box.
C-2
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
Pre-Installation: Updating usbstor.inf And wceusbsh.inf
•
If necessary, tap on the [Browse] buttons to select different paths for the
inf files.
3. Device Driver Install Selection Dialog Box:
You can choose to have the device drivers installed immediately by
selecting the check box, or you can leave the check box blank and
Windows will install the 8525 the next time it is connected. It is recommended that the device be installed immediately.
•
•
Note:
Select the drivers you want to update – wceusbsh and usbstor.
Tap on the [Next] button.
None of the drivers are updated by default. To complete the process, you
must establish USB connections.
4. Device Driver Backup Selection Dialog Box:
The USB Setup application will attempt to back up the driver .sys
files before attempting the installation. It specifies which files it will try
to back up and the location to which it will back them up.
Note:
Both drivers are selected for backup by default. The backup directory is
[system directory&gt;\drivers\ptxBackup.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
C-3
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC
C.1.3 Installation: Installing The 8525 As a Device On Your PC
1. Install Dialog Box:
The .sys files you selected are copied to the backup directory. If an
unknown error occurs during the backup, you are asked whether you’d
prefer to cancel the install or continue with the process. The
wceusbsh.inf and usbstor.inf files are updated.
2. If you indicated that the wceusbsh driver should be installed, the
Install dialog box appears again. The USB Setup application will
attempt to install the drivers immediately. This will succeed only if a
valid USB connection to the device that is running Windows CE .NET
exists.
• If the install fails due to an unknown error, the install for this particular
driver is aborted.
• If the install fails because there was an inappropriate USB connection, there
are two possibilities:
• An appropriate USB connection was never established between the PC
and the 8525 running Windows CE .NET. In this case, when an appropriate USB connection with this device exists, Windows will automatically attempt to install the device driver.
• An appropriate USB connection exists between the PC and the 8525
running Windows CE .NET, but it has since been severed. Windows
may or may not attempt to automatically install the device drivers on the
next appropriate USB connection.
• A window is displayed where you can tap on [Cancel] to abort the
wceusbsh driver installation and continue. It also contains instructions to
boot your device into Windows CE .NET and establish a USB connection
between the device and the PC. When you create the appropriate connection, Windows automatically installs the device drivers. The ‘Found New
Hardware’ wizard may appear. Your only interaction with this window is to
click on the [Finish] button.
• If this is the first appropriate connect between the device and the PC –
i.e., there was no previous devnode for the device in the system – the
[Continue] button is activated as soon as the connection is made. Where
there was a devnode present in the system and it has been marked for reinstall, the [Continue] button will not become active until Windows has comC-4
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Appendix C: USB Setup Application
Post Installation
pleted the driver installation and the device is no longer marked for
reinstall. Only one devnode per device can be ‘unset’ when the device
drivers are finally installed.
3. If you indicated that the usbstor driver should be installed, the same
steps as described above are carried out for usbstor except that the
8525 must be running BooSt. (Press and hold down the [SCAN]
[BLUE] [ENTER] keys for a minimum of 6 seconds to launch the
BooSt program.) Keep in mind that a device running BooSt has a different hardware ID than when it is running Windows CE .NET.
C.1.4 Post Installation
1. Done Dialog Box:
This dialog box indicates the success or failure of the installation.
• To view the log file, tap on the [Log File] button
• To exit the program, tap on the [Exit] button.
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
C-5
INDEX
# of Cols (ANSI) 206
# of Cols (TESS) 220
# of Pages (ANSI) 206
# of Rows (ANSI) 206
# of Rows (TESS) 220
A
accents, adding (Custom Characters) 197
accessories
bar code readers, connecting 255
acknowledged host number (ah) 176
acknowledged remote number (ar) 176
acknowledgements, transmitted (xa) 175
acknowledgements received 175
AcQ (# of messages sent but not acknowledged by cellular master) 176
Active Conn Tab 114
ActiveSync
ASync profile 110
Addendum 134, 136, 137
addresses, network See also Network
addresses 250
Ad Hoc network 21
Advanced (wireless connection) 26
Advanced button (Radio tab) 108
ah (acknowledged host number) 176
AIAG
AIAG Character 234
AIAG Strip 131
Mixed AIAG 229
AIAG Character 234
AIAG Strip 131
aiming dot, duration of 130
All Fld Video 231
Alpha parameters 179, 180
ALT Key 36
anchor (viewport) 245
Anchor Column 246
Anchor Line 246
Anchor View
x origin 218, 232
y origin 218, 232
ANSI
# of Cols 206
# of Pages 206
# of Rows 206
Applications menu 200
arrow keys 171
auto-answerback string 210
Auto Login (Telnet Settings) 203
Auto Term# 201, 218
Group 201, 219
block mode 172, 210–212
Colour Override 208
configuration 170
Conn Type (connection type) 202
CR character 215
device attribute requests 171
device attribute string 210
disabling the keyboard/scanner 215
Edit Modes 215–216
ENTER key 171, 213
ENTER Pmpt (Telnet Settings) 203
ESC Prompt (Telnet Settings) 203
Func Key Remap (Telnet Settings)
205
Function key equivalents 171
Group Auto Term# 201, 219
Host (Telnet Settings) 203
Kbd Modes 212–215
keyboard lock 211
LF character 215
local editing mode 172, 209
Login (Telnet Settings) 204
Login Failed (Telnet Settings) 204
Login Prompt (Telnet Settings) 204
Media Copy 210
mnemonics 216
multiple sessions 200
Password (Telnet Settings) 204
Password Echo (Telnet Settings) 204
Password Prompt (Telnet Settings)
204
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
I
Index
Port 203
sessions, closing 173
sessions, establishing new 173
sessions, listing 173
sessions, moving between 173
settings 201–218
Telnet connection 202
Terminal # 201
Terminal Type 203
transmitting data 133, 135, 211
Xmit Modes 209–212
802.IQ connection 202
ANSI Settings
Connection Type - Telnet &amp; TCP Direct
202
Screen settings 206
AP/Controller mac , displaying 175
App. parameter 221
appearance (display colour scheme) 77
Append Enter 229
Append F0 229
appending to bar codes
characters 133, 135
Applications
ANSI Settings 201–218
character attributes (TESS) 222
Character Sets (TESS) 222
Console 240
Fields parameters (TESS) 230
Host Conn (ANSI) 202
Host Conn (TESS) 219
menu (Applications) 200
RadioStats 240
Scanner parameters (TESS) 229
Screen parameters (ANSI) 206
Screen parameters (TESS) 220
TESS Settings 218–233
Type and Title 200
approvals
8525 274
ar (acknowledged remote number) 176
arrow keys 171
completing a data field 163, 230
cycling through special
characters 181
Enh Mode, using 232
moving the cursor 36
Arrow mode 212
Arrows 249
II
ASCII
decimal equivalents of characters 224
Full Ascii 131
matching fields 223
Async In 217
attributes, video 207–208, 231
Audio 190
audio indicators
description of beep conditions 44
Authentication, Bluetooth Controls 111
authentication, network 22
Auto-Answer 210
Auto Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 203
Auto Radio Addr 186, 251
Auto Radio Address (Cellular Radio)
102
Auto Radio Address (Cellular Radio
Address) 102
AutoRep Fn (function key sent
to host) 224
AutoRep T/O 224
Auto Start 192
auto tab fields 162
Auto Term# (ANSI) 201, 218
Auto wrap 215
B
backlight
display 78
keyboard 37
backspace (CTRL H) 213, 214
backup profile, creating (Total Recall) 120
backup profile, restoring (Total Recall)
124
bar code
AIAG 229
appending to 133, 135
connecting bar code reader 255
decodes required 131
decoding edge-to-edge 131
parameters 128–144
prefix character 133, 135
Security 131
stripping characters 133, 135
suffix character 133, 135
symbologies
Codabar 137
Code 11 138
Code 128 133
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
Code 39 131–132
Code 93 138
Discrete 2 of 5 139
EAN 13 134
EAN 8 136
IATA 2 of 5 140
Interleaved 2 of 5 138
MSI Plessey 139
UPC A 136
UPC E 137
Barcode Character 234
bar-code-only fields 162
bar code reader
external (specs) 276
external scanner, operation of 255
integrated scanner, operation of 44
batteries
backup battery in use indicator 43
charging 43
installing 33
power card slots dialogue box 91
power suspend dialogue box 90
removing 33
specifications 280
very low icon 43
Baud 141, 143, 243
Baud Rate/Modulation 106
beacons received (rb) 175
beacon timeouts (bt) 176
Beam Lockout 230
beep conditions 190
beeper
description of beep conditions 44
beeper sounds 190
Beep Tone and Beep Time 190
bell (CTRL G) 213
Binary print 225
BKSP 36
BKSP/DEL Key
TESS sessions, BKSP key behaviour in
165
TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in
166
BKSP Key 36
BKSP key
BKSP key (ANSI) 214
blinking video attribute 207, 231
Block Cursor 194
block mode, ANSI 172, 210–212
BLUE Key 35
Bluetooth radio
changing device name 114
device service profiles 110
ISM band 108
PINs for devices 111
radio configuration 108–114
Bluetooth setup 108
GPRS setup 115
peripherals 255
bold video attribute 207, 231
Bootloader (Shutdown menu) 66
bootnum
802.IQ 175
802.IQ, displaying 175
Bright For (backlight) 78
Brightness 248
Brk for Attn 236
BSP, Bluetooth Controls 114
bt (beacon timeouts) 176
Buffer 244
C
ca (cellular address) 176
cable diagrams B-1
cables
installing in vehicle 266
calibrating (touchscreen) 38, 92
card slots, enabling power to 91
cellular address (ca) 176
Cellular Radio Address 102
CH, Bluetooth Controls 110
changing password (Start Menu security)
60
changing softkey labels (Label F1-F10)
208, 221
Channel Enable List 99
Channel List, editing 101
Channel Number 98
Channel Selection 100
Channel Switch Speed 99
Channel Tab (Narrow Band radio) 98
Character parameters (TESS) 222
characters
appending to bar codes 133, 135
Char Set, choosing (TESS) 222
cycling through 181
decimal values of 224
EOB chars 212
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
III
Index
EOL chars 212
Lower (ANSI) 217
prefix 133, 135
stripping 133, 135
suffix 133, 135
Upper (ANSI) 217
character set (Tether &amp; Console Port) 242
Character Sets
Host Char Set 217
character sets
choosing in TESS 222
Lower (ANSI) 217
Upper (ANSI) 217
Char Set (TESS) 222
Check Digit 138
check digit 134, 137, 138, 139, 140
Check Digit, One 139
Clear Entry Fields 233
CLR/DEL key
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 213
CLR Key 250
Codabar 137
Code 11 138
Code 128 133
Code 39 131–132
Code 93 138
Cold Reset (Shutdown menu) 66
Colour Override 208, 222
Column Offset 246
columns
number of in ANSI screen 206
number of in TESS screen 220
COM, Bluetooth Controls 114
Command Prompt 62
Command Region Up, Down, Left &amp;
Right 235
Communities 146
configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F10)
221
configuring softkey labels (Label F1-F5)
208
connecting
Auto Login (ANSI Telnet Settings)
203
ENTER Pmpt (ANSI Telnet
Settings) 203
Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Login Failed (ANSI Telnet Settings)
204
IV
Login Prompt (ANSI Telnet
Settings) 204
Password (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Password Echo (ANSI Telnet
Settings) 204
Password Prompt (ANSI Telnet
Settings) 204
connection, host 202, 219
connection list table, Bluetooth Controls
114
Conn Type (connection type) 202, 219
Console 240
Contact 145
Cont Nxt Fld 229
control codes 216
control panel
accessing 71
basic setup 76
Display Properties 76
icons 72
keyboard properties 79
power management properties 89
stylus properties 91
Convert to UPC-A 137
country code 134
CR/LF
CTRL J 213
LF character 215
Newline 215
CRC (serial I/O) 228
CTRL commands
CTRL a 173
CTRL c 168
CTRL f 164
CTRL G (Bell) 213
CTRL h 169
CTRL H (Backspace) 213
CTRL h (host select) 168
CTRL i 164
CTRL I (Tab) 213
CTRL J (Line Feed) 213
CTRL K (Vertical Tab) 213
CTRL L 169
CTRL L (Form Feed) 213
CTRL p (reprint) 168
CTRL r 164
CTRL s 167
CTRL s (status, displaying
continuously) 168
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
CTRL t 167
CTRL t (status, display with unit #) 168
CTRL u 164
CTRL w 167
CTRL Key 36
cursor
changing shape of 194
Enh Edit mode 232
Field Order 230
linefeed mode (ANSI) 213
moving between fields 212, 230
newline mode (ANSI) 213
Custom Characters 197
cycle tasks 63
D
data
entering 163, 232
Ign Bcode_fld 232
with a bar code reader 255
serial I/O 228
Serial In/Out 227
transmitting from the terminal 214, 230
transmitting from the 8525 163, 209
Data Bits 141, 143, 243
Data Squelch 106
data stream type (typ) 176
DC external power icon 43
DEC Cursor Keys (ANSI Keyboard
parameter) 215
decimal values of keys 224
decoded (external) parameters 141, 142
decoded scanners 129
decoding bar codes
decodes required 131
Security 131
decrementing parameters 178, 180
Default All Parameters 97
Default Colour 199
Default font 207, 231
DEFAULT key (F3) 158
DEFLT key (F3) 183
DEL/CLR key
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 213
DEL Key 36
DEL key
DEL key (ANSI) 214
desktop connection, remote 71
Dev Attr 210
device attribute requests 171
device attribute string 210
Device Name, changing 114
dialogue box, using 66
digit
check digit 134, 137, 138, 139, 140
number system 136, 137
Dim For (backlight) 78
Disable kbd 215
disabling/enabling Y/N parameters 179,
180
disconnecting
ESC Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings)
203
Discrete 2 of 5 139
Disp controls 216
display
Anchor Column 246
Anchor Line 246
Anchor View 218, 233
appearance (colour scheme) 77
background (control panel) 77
backlight 78
Brightness 248
Display Properties 76
Display Shift 193
Field Scroll 221
ICH/DCH controls 216
Line Scrolling 248
moving 194
Origin Scroll 220
Panning 248
positioning 220
split screens 194
Use Increment 194
video attributes 207–208, 231
viewport, mapping 245
Wraparound 248
X-Increment 194
Y-Increment 194
displaying TESS version number 167
Display Menu
selecting a TESS session 162
Display menu 177
Display Properties 76
Display Shift 193
Dot Time 130
Double-Tap (stylus settings) 92
DUN service, Bluetooth 110
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
V
Index
E
EAN/UCC 128 134
EAN 13 134
EAN 8 136
EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)
23
Echo Mode 213
Edit extent 216
editing 209
Edit Modes 215–216
edit modes, TESS 164
empty entry fields 224
Emulation
2392 Telnet 233
AIAG Character 234
Barcode Character 234
Clear Entry Fields 233
Command Region Up, Down, Left
&amp; Right 235
Enable Alarm 235
Features 233
Fixed Field Overhd 234
Passthru Printing 234
Send CR with FKEY 233
Serial IO Character 234
3274 Telnet 235
BRK for Attn 236
Features 237
FKEY0-39 237
Fujitsu Host 235
Intl EBCDIC 236
IP for SysReq 236
LU Name 236
LU Name Enabled 236
Null In Fields 236
5250 Telnet 238
Features 239
FKEY0-39 240
Intl EBCDIC 238
LU Name Enabled 239
LU Name Prefix 239
Nulls In Fields 238
Remap Underline To 238
Term Type 239
WEC (Write Error Code) 238
Emulation 233
emulation keys, IBM 5250 162
Enable Alarm 235
VI
Enable Cellular Protocol 102
Enable Power Saving 105
Enable SNMP 146
enabling/disabling Y/N parameters 179,
180
Encryption, Bluetooth Controls 111
END 37
End (ANSI) 217
END Key 37
Enh Edit Mode (TESS) 232
ENTER key 171
completing a data field 163
CR/LF character 215
Enter on Arrows 230
Local Echo mode (ANSI) 213
newline mode (ANSI) 213
Xmit Enter 214
Enter On Arr 230
ENTER Pmpt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 203
Enter To F0 230
ENT Key 250
entry fields 162
empty fields 224
Function keys 232
hidden match 223
Ign Bcode_fld 232
video attributes 207–208, 231
visible match 223
Entry Mode 231
entry mode 231
EOB chars 212
EOL chars 212
Erasure Mode 215
Error Accept 132
Error Tone and Error Time 190
ESC Key 36
ESC Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 203
Exit 192
Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)
23
F
Fcursor mode 164
features (of 8525) 4
Features (2392 Telnet) 233
Features (3274 Telnet) 237
Features (5250 Telnet) 239
FETM 211
fh (forward host number) 176
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
Field mode 164
Field Order 230
fields
Arrow mode 212
auto-tab fields 162
bar-code-only fields 162
completing a data field 163, 230
Enh Edit mode 232
entry fields 162, 224
Field Order 230
Field Scroll 221
Field Size 132
fixed fields 162
hidden match 223
Ign Bcode_fld 232
“insert” mode 214, 231
match fields 162
“replace” mode 214, 231
serial I/O fields 162
Serial In/Out 227
size 132
“transmit on” 163
video attributes 207–208, 231
visible match 223
Fields parameters (for TESS Settings) 230
Fill Chr 224
Fixed Field Overhd 234
fixed fields 162
F Keys (function keys) 250
FKEY0-39 237, 240
Flow Control 243
Follow Cursor 248
font
Default Font 207, 231
Font Change 192
Font Override 199
Foreground &amp; Background (Colour
Override) 209, 222
Foreground &amp; Background (Default
Colour) 199
Format Effector Transfer
Mode (FETM) 211
form feed (CTRL L) 213
forward host number (fh) 176
forward remote number (fr) 176
fr (forward remote number) 176
Frequency Table (Radio tab) 107
Fujitsu Host 235
Full Ascii 131
Func Key Remap (ANSI Telnet Settings)
205
Function Keys 37, 157
softkeys 158
Function keys 171
ANSI equivalents 171
auto reply mode 224
completing a data field 163
entering data 232
executing procedures from the
local menu 169
FKEY0-39 (3274 Telnet) 237
FKEY0-39 (5250 Telnet) 240
Label F1-F10, changing 208, 221
Open Fky Only 232
serial I/O 228
G
GATM (Guarded Area Transfer
Mode) 211
Global Positioning System Unit 256
GPRS (bluetooth) 115
GPS Unit 256
Group (ANSI Auto Term#) 201, 219
H
helpdesk 4
hidden fields match 223
H Match Chr 223
HOME 36, 37
HOME Key 36, 37
host
multiple hosts 169
selecting a host 169
switching between hosts 225
Host (ANSI Telnet Settings) 203
Host (TESS Connection Type) 220
Host Char Set 217
Host Connection
ANSI 202
TESS 219
Host echo mode 213
host select (CTRL h) 168
host terminal number of session (tn) 176
I
I/O fields 162
IATA 2 of 5 140
IBM 5250 Emulation Keys 162
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual VII
Index
ICD/DCH controls, displaying 216
Idle Poll Limit 105
IEEE 802.11 radio, configuring 19
Ign Bcode_fld 232
Include Check 134, 136, 137, 139, 140
Include Check (Discrete 2 of 5
symbology) 140
Include Check (Interleaved 2 of 5
symbology) 139
Include Chk 131, 136, 138
Include Country 134
Include Number Sys 136, 137
Include Sym (Code 128) 133
incrementing parameters 178, 180
Indicators 189
indicators
backup battery in use 43
battery charging icon 43
battery very low icon 43
LED functions 39
modifier keys 41
onscreen 41
power, DC 43
radio signal quality 42
scanner message 46
security level 43
status area 161
task bar 57
inf
usbstor, installing C-4
usbstor, updating C-2
wceusbsh, installing C-4
wceusbsh, updating C-2
Info Tab (Narrow Band radio) 94
Infrastructure network 21
initialized messages, transmitted (802.IQv1
xi) See xi (transmitted initialize
messages) 175
Initial RTT 187, 252
Input 144
input
bar-code-only fields 162
bar code reader 255
I/O fields 227
Input tmo 244
“insert” mode 214, 231
Open Fky Only 232
Output tmo 244
“replace” mode 214, 231
VIII
serial I/O 228
serial I/O fields 162
Serial In/Out 227
Input Panel 124
Input Panel (control panel) 74
Input Tmo 244
Insert mode 164
“insert” mode 214, 231
INS Key 36
installation
8570 cables to devices 266
integrated scanner option 44
Intensity (7035 backlighting) 78, 80
Interleaved 2 of 5 138
Internet Explorer 62
Intl EBCDIC 236, 238
IP address, assigning 24
IP for SysReq 236
ISM band, Bluetooth radio 108
ITF Check (Discrete 2 of 5 symbology)
140
ITF Check (IATA 2 of 5 symbology) 140
ITF Check (I 2 of 5 symbology) 139
I 2 of 5
Short Code 130
K
Kbd lock 211
Kbd Locked 226
Kbd Modes 212–215
keyboard
compatibility with VT220 ANSI
keyboard 171
disabling the keyboard 215
function keys 171
Kbd modes 212–215
key repeat 79, 80
lock 211, 226
lock messages 168
one shot mode 81
Keyboard (Tekterm) 188
keyboard backlight 37
keyboard keys 34
ALT 36
arrow keys 36
BKSP 36
BLUE key 35
CTRL 36
DEFAULT key (F3) 158
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
DEL 36
END 37
ESC 36
Function keys 37
HOME 36, 37
INS 36
LITERAL key (F5) 158
Macro keys 37
macro keys 82, 158, 188
modifiers 34
navigating using the keyboard 54
NEXT key (F1) 158
one shot mode 81
ORANGE key 35
PREVIOUS key (F2) 158
SAVE key (F4) 158
SHIFT 35
softkeys 158
SPACE 36
TAB 36
keyboard mapping (Scan-See) 250
Keyboard Properties 79, 80
backlight 80
one shot mode 81
Key Index, assigning 23
Key Repeat tab 79
keys
emulation keys, IBM 5250 162
transmit key 211
L
Label F1-F10 208, 221
labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F10)
221
labels, changing softkey (Label F1-F5)
208
LANAccessUsingPPP service, Bluetooth
110
Late TX Limit (Polling) 104
launching
DOS 177
Parameters menu 177
Tekterm 177
Lcl Process 169, 225
LED
charge 40
functions (8525) 39
receive 40
scan 40
transmit 40
LED Scan-See
Brightness 248
LF/CR
CTRL J 213
LF character 215
Newline 215
Line Offset 246
Line Scrolling 248
LITERAL key (F5) 158
local
editing mode, ANSI 172, 209
Local echo mode 213
menu 169
procedures 169
process 169, 225
Save on Reset 225
Location 146
“LOCK–B” message 168, 220
locked keyboard 211, 226
locked 8525 224
“LOCK–H” message 168, 220
lock time, decreasing with
queuing mode 170
Login (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Login Failed (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Login Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Lower (ANSI Host Char Set) 217
Low Level screen (Narrow Nand radio) 96
LU Name 236
LU Name Enabled 236, 239
LU Name Prefix 239
M
MAC address, access point/controller 175
MAC address, 8525 175
Macro Keys 37
Macro keys
accessing 158
executing a macro 83, 84
Macros menu, accessing 82, 188
recording and saving 82
maintenance (8525) 49
Manual Radio Address (Cellular Radio
Address) 102
Manual Switch Table 100
mapping keyboard (Scan-See) 250
mapping viewport 245
match fields 162
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
IX
Index
MATM 211
Media Copy (ANSI) 210
memory, resetting 183
menu, local 169
Menu mode
taskbar (switching between apps) 160
menus, working with 177
message mask (msk) 176
messages
enabling/disabling next message 226
“LOCK–B” 168, 220
“LOCK–H” 168, 220
“NEXT–B” 169, 170
“NEXT–H” 169, 170
“RESET: Press Enter” 161
TESS status message 167
messages, retransmitting (802.IQv1 xr) See
xr (retransmissions) 176
messages received (rm) 175
messages transmitted (xm) 175
milestone 226
Mixed AIAG 229
mnemonics (ANSI) 216
mode
serial I/O 227
Model 7000
Brightness 248
modifier keys 34
locking 35
One Shot Mode 81
unlocking 35
Modulation/Baud Rate 106
Mod 10 Check 132, 140
Mod 10 Check (Discrete 2 of 5
symbology) 139
Mod 10 Check (I 2 of 5 symbology) 139
Mod 43 Check 132
moving the display 194, 220
MSI Plessey 139
msk (message mask) 176
multiple
ANSI sessions 200
applications 200
hosts 169
TESS sessions 200
Multiple Area Transfer
Mode (MATM) 211
X
N
Name 147
name servers, assigning 25
Narrow Band radio 94
Channel tab 98
Info tab 94
Low Level screen 96
Power tab 105
Protocol tab 102
Radio tab 106
statistics screen 95
network
Ad Hoc 21
connection, monitoring 47
control panel settings 250
infrastructure 21
Network addresses 250
network authentication 22
Network Key, assigning 23
Newline 215
“NEXT–B” message 169, 170
“NEXT–H” message 169, 170
NEXT key (F1) 158
Next X 226
Null In Fields 236
Nulls In Fields 238
number
of columns (ANSI) 206
of columns (TESS) 220
of pages (ANSI) 206
of rows (ANSI) 206
of rows (TESS) 220
Terminal # (ANSI) 170, 201
Terminal # (TESS) 162
number system digit 136, 137
numeric fields (Rjct if Alpha) 230
numeric parameters 178, 180
numeric parameters, minimum/maximum
limits to 178, 180
O
Off &amp; On buttons 17
off, turning the unit 33
offices list 4
off-line 8525
using local procedures 169
offset (viewport) 245
On &amp; Off button 17
on, turning the unit 33
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
One Check Digit 139
one dimensional internal scanner 46
One Shot Mode 81
ON For 81
Open (network authentication) 22
Open Fky Only 232
ORANGE Key 35
order of fields in TESS screen 230
Origin Scroll 220
Outgoing, Bluetooth Controls 112
Output 144
output/input fields, serial port 227
Output Tmo 244
P
pages
# of Cols (TESS) 220
# of Columns (ANSI) 206
# of Pages (ANSI) 206
# of Rows (ANSI) 206
# of Rows (TESS) 220
positioning 220
queuing mode 170
reprinting 168
size/shape 206
Pages Saved (TESS) 221
Panning 248
parameters
Alpha parameters 179, 180
numeric 178, 180
saving changes to 182
string entry 179, 181
Y/N (boolean) 179, 180
Parity 142, 143, 243
Passthru Printing 234
Password (ANSI Telnet Settings) 204
Password Echo (ANSI Telnet Settings)
204
Password Prompt (ANSI Telnet Settings)
204
period – ASCII decimal equivalent 224
peripherals, defining connections 241
PIN, Bluetooth Controls 110
pinouts B-1
PINs, Bluetooth devices 111
pins – enabling for printing 225
pivot (viewport) 245
pocket PC compatibility 71
Polling 103
polling values, testing 104
Poll Timeout (Polling) 104
Port (ANSI Telnet Settings) 203
Port (TESS Connection Type) 220
Port (802.IQ v2) 251
port pinouts B-1
Port Prefix, Bluetooth Controls 114
ports
ANSI Connection Type 203
Baud 243
Buffer 244
Data Bits 243
Flow Control 243
Input tmo 244
Output tmo 244
parameters 242
Parity 243
Retries 244
serial 227
Serial In/Out 227
settings 241
settings (tether &amp; console port) 241
settings for Tether and console 242
Shared 244
Stop Bits 243
TESS Connection Type 220
Test 245
Tether and Console Port settings 241
port settings (tether &amp; console) 241–245
position
of screen 220
power icon, external DC 43
powering up 33
Power Management Properties 89
card slots 91
suspend, power saving 90
Power Mgmt 191
Power Off Time 106
Power Tab (Narrow Band radio) 105
Power Up Channel 98
power up 8525 17
preferred networks 26
prefix (serial I/O) 228
Prefix Char 133, 135
PREVIOUS key (F2) 158
PREV key (F2) 178, 180
Printer (serial service), Bluetooth 110
printing
Binary print parameter 225
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
XI
Index
pages 168
Printer parameter 225
PrintScreen key 214
procedures, local 225
process, local 169, 225
profile, creating backup 120
profile, restoring backup 124
Programs
Command Prompt 62
Internet Explorer 62
Remote Desktop Connection 62
Windows Explorer 62
protocol, 802.IQ v1 186
Protocol Tab (Narrow Band radio) 102
Protocol Type 187
punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT
Key) 35
Q
Q (memory address of first message in
receive queue) 176
queue, memory address of first message in
receive queue (Q) 176
queue, transmissions waiting in (TxQ) 176
queuing
enabling/disabling next message 226
mode 170, 225
pages 170
Queuing parameter 169, 225
response time, improving 170
R
ra (received acknowledgements) 175
radio
adding new network connection 21
advanced settings of 26
Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)
251
Bluetooth 108–114
configuring
adding a new network connection
21
Ad Hoc 21
authentication, network 22
Connect button 20
EAP (Extensible Authentication
Protocol) 23
Infrastructure 21
Key Index 23
XII
Key Index, assigning 23
network authentication 22
Network Key 23
Network Key, assigning 23
wireless information 20
wireless properties 21
802.1X authentication 23
Connect button 20
Initial RTT (WaveLAN 802.11 DS
SS) 187, 252
IP address, assigning 24
name servers 25
Narrow Band 94
preferred networks, arranging 26
Protocol Type 187
Radio Address (narrow band radio)
252
Radio Address (WaveLAN 802.11 DS
SS) 187
signal quality 42
statistics screen
802.IQ 174
wireless connection, setting up 19
802.IQ statistics screen 174
802.11 19
Radio Addr
Auto Radio Addr (narrow band radio)
251
Radio Address 187, 252
narrow band radio 252
WaveLAN 802.11 DS SS 187
802.IQ v1 187
radio address, automatic (802.IQ v1) 186
radio specifications 275
radio statistics screen
802.IQ 174
RadioStats 240
Radio Tab (Narrow Band radio) 106
rb (received beacons) 175
recalibrating (touchscreen) 38, 92
received acknowledgements 175
received beacons (rb) 175
received messages (rm) 175
receive LED 40
Remap Underline To 238
Remote Desktop Connection 62
remote desktop connection 71
Repeat Delay (between key repeats) 80
Repeat Rate (of key repeats) 80
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
Repeat tab (key repeat settings) 79
Replace mode 164
“replace” mode 231
reprinting a page 168
“RESET: Press Enter” message 161
resetting
default parameter values 183
TESS session 168
8525 memory 183
resetting the 8525 27
response time, improving with
queuing mode 170
retransmissions (802.IQv1 xr) See xr
(retransmissions) 176
Retries 244
reverse video attribute 207, 231
Rights 147
Rjct if Alpha 230
rm (received messages) 175
round trip time (rt) 176
rows
number of in ANSI screen 206
number of in TESS screen 220
rt (round trip time) 176
Run (Start Menu) 65
S
safeguards 257
safety instructions
general VII
scanner 44
safety warning, scanner 44
SATM 212
SAVE key (F4) 158
Save on Reset 225
scanner
aiming (target) dot duration 130
Append Enter 229
Append F0 229
Cont Nxt Fld 229
decoded 129
decoded (external)
Serial Port 142
Tether Port 141
disabling the scanner 215
Dot Time 130
one dimensional (1D) internal scanner
46
parameters (for TESS Settings) 229
safety warnings 44
target dot duration 130
techniques (scanning) 44
TESS Scanner parameters 229
troubleshooting tips 45
scanning
AIAG 229
aiming (target) dot duration 130
Append Enter 229
Append F0 229
appending characters 133, 135
check digit 134, 137, 138, 139, 140
Cont Nxt Fld 229
country code 134
decoded 129
decoded (external)
Serial Port 142
Tether Port 141
Dot Time 130
Input (translate) 144
locked 8525 230
number system digit 136, 137
Output (translate) 144
prefix character 133, 135
removing characters 133, 135
Rjct if Alpha 230
safety instructions 44
Scan-See 241
Security 131
Short Code 130
suffix character 133, 135
target (aiming) dot duration 130
TESS Scanner parameters 229
Type (translate) 144
Verify 131
Scan-See
keyboard mapping 250
parameters, setting 245–250
port settings 241
serial number 249
viewport, mapping 245
Scan Tone and Scan Time 190
screen
stylus, using to navigate 53
touch pen, using 53
Windows CE, navigating 53
Screen parameters
ANSI 206
TESS 220
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual XIII
Index
screens
# of Cols (ANSI) 206
# of Cols (TESS) 220
# of Rows (ANSI) 206
# of Rows (TESS) 220
Anchor View 218, 233
Display Shift 193
Field Scroll 221
moving between fields 212, 230
Origin Scroll 220
page size/shape 206, 220
positioning 220
splitting view of 194
Type and View IDs (Split screen) 194
Use Increment 194
x and y origin 218, 233
X-Increment 194
Y-Increment 194
Screen Switch 192
scrolling
Field Scroll 221
Origin Scroll 220
Security 131
security level icon 43
Security Settings 59
changing password 60
configuring taskbar 61
level 59
Supervisor 59
Teklogix 59
User 59
security settings 184
default mode 192
Selected Area Transfer Mode (SATM) 212
select host (CTRL h) 168
selecting a host 169
Send Mile 226
Send with FKEY) 233
serial I/O
TESS command 227
serial I/O fields 162
Serial In 227
Serial IO Character 234
serial number (Scan-See) 249
Serial Out 227
Serial Port 227
serial port
enabling pins for printers 225
I/O fields 227
Serial In 227
Serial Out 227
Serial Port 227
SI CRC 228
SI Fkey 228
SI mode 227
SI prefix/suffix 228
SO CRC 228
SO prefix/suffix 228
Serial Port settings 142
Baud 143
Data Bits 143
Parity 143
Stop Bits 143
Servers, Bluetooth Controls 112
service information 4
Services, Bluetooth Controls 110
session status (sts) 176
Set Mode (SM) control 216
Set PIN, Bluetooth Controls 111
Settings
Control Panel 64
Network and Dial-up connections 64
Run 64
Taskbar and Start Menu 64
setting the session number 162
Shared 244
Shared Mode (network authentication) 22
SHIFT Key 35
Short Code 130
Shutdown
Bootloader 66
Cold Reset 66
Suspend 66
Warm Reset 66
Shutdown (Start Menu) 65
SI CRC 228
SI Fkey 228
signal quality,radio 42
SI mode 227
Simple Network Management (SNMP)
See SNMP 144
SIP 124
SIP (Soft Input Panel 74
SI prefix/suffix 228
size
of fields 132
Size/Chars (bar code scanning)
132
XIV Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
Smart echo mode 213
SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol) 144
Communities 146
Contact 145
Enable SNMP 146
Location 146
Name 147
Rights 147
SO CRC 228
Soft Input Panel (SIP) 74
soft keyboard 124
softkey function keys 158
softkeys 189
softkeys (Function keys) 158
softkey labels, changing (Label
F1-F10) 221
softkey labels, changing (Label F1-F5)
208
Softkeys (parameter) 189
SO prefix/suffix 228
sound 190
Sound Ctrl 191
SPACE Key 36
specifications
battery 280
for 8525 273
Split Screen
dividing and displaying 195
moving the cursor between
split screens 196
parameters used 194
toggling between full and
split screens 196
Type and View IDs 194
using a Wild Card (asterisk) 196
Split Screen 194
Standard (Code 128) 134
Start (ANSI) 217
Start Menu 58
cycle tasks 63
desktop 59
programs 62
Run 65
Security 59
Settings 64
Shutdown 65
system tray 63
task manager 64
start up menu 177
Statistics button (Radio tab) 108
statistics screen
802.IQ 174
Statistics screen (Narrow Band radio) 95
status, displaying continuously 168
status, displaying unit # 168
status area (Tekterm) 161
status message, TESS 167
Stop Bits 142, 143, 243
string entry parameters 179, 181
adding special characters to 181
cycling through special characters 181
key function description 179, 181
Strip Leading 133, 135
Strip Trailing 133, 135
sts (session status) 176
stylus (touch pen), using 53
Stylus Properties 91
Double-tap (stylus sensitivity) 92
sub-menus, accessing 178, 179
suffix
serial I/O 228
suffix (serial I/O) 228
Suffix Char 133, 135
Supervisor security level 59
support services 4
Suspend (Shutdown menu) 66
suspending power 90
Suspend State 90
switching on &amp; off 33
symbologies
IATA 2 of 5 140
Sync Delay (Polling) 103
System parameters (Tekterm) 188
system tray 63
T
tab (CTRL I) 213
tab, vertical (CTRL K) 213
TAB Key 36
Tab stop mode 216
target dot, duration of 130
taskbar
onscreen indicators
backup battery in use 43
battery charging 43
battery very low icon 43
modifier keys 41
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual XV
Index
power, external DC 43
radio signal quality 42
security level 43
using 57
task manager 64
TCP Direct connection 202, 219
Teklogix security level 59
Tekterm 157
Telnet connection 202, 219
Telnet connection (ANSI) 202
terminal
Terminal # (ANSI) 201
Terminal # (ANSI) 201
Terminal # (TESS) 219
Terminal (8525) mac, displaying 175
Terminal Type (ANSI Telnet Settings)
203
Term Type 239
TESS 161
# of Cols 220
# of Rows 220
All Fld Video 231
Append Enter 229
Append F0 229
Applications menu 200
BKSP key behaviour 165
Blink (video attrib.) 231
Bold (video attrib.) 231
Colour Override 222
configuration 162
Conn Type (connection type) 219
Cont Nxt Fld 229
CTRL commands 164
cursor movement (in edit modes) 164
DEL key behaviour 166
displaying version number 167
Display menu, using 162
edit modes 164
Enh Edit Mode 232
Enter On Arr 230
Enter To F0 230, 232
Entry Mode 231
Fcursor mode 164
Field mode 164
Field Order 230
Field parameters 230
Host (Connection Type) 220
Ign Bcode_fld 232
Insert mode 164
Kbd Locked 226
keyboard lock 226
matching fields via data stream 223
milestone 226
modes (edit) 164
multiple sessions 200
number of columns in screen 220
number of rows in screen 220
Pages Saved 221
Port 220
query command 221
Replace mode 164
resetting a TESS session 168
Reverse (video attrib.) 231
running multiple sessions 162
selecting a session 162
settings 218–233
status message 167
switching between hosts 225
Terminal # 219
Tests 224
Valid Numerics 232
video attributes 231
802.IQ connection 219
9010t connection 219
TESS Settings
character attributes 222
character sets, choosing 222
Connection Type - Telnet &amp; TCP Direct
219
Fields parameters 230
Scanner parameters 229
screen settings 220
Test 245
Test Polling Values 104
Test Squelch (Radio tab) 107
Tether &amp; Console Port
character set 242
peripheral devices 241
scan-see parameters 245
Tether &amp; Console Ports
Baud 243
Buffer 244
Data Bits 243
Flow Control 243
Input Tmo 244
Output Tmo 244
Parity 243
Retries 244
Stop Bits 243
XVI Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
Index
Test 245
tethered device
connecting and disconnecting 46
Tether Port settings 141
Baud 141
Data Bits 141
Parity 142
Stop Bits 142
timeouts, beacon (bt) 176
tn (host terminal number of session) 176
Total Recall 120
backup profile, creating 120
backup profile, restoring 124
touch pen, using 53
touchscreen
recalibration 38, 92
stylus, using 53
touch pen, using 53
Transfer Termination Mode (TTM) 212
transmissions waiting in queue (TxQ) 176
transmit LED 40
transmitted acknowledgements (xa) 175
transmitted initialized messages (xi) 175
transmitted messages (xm) 175
transmitting data 209, 211, 214, 230
“transmit on” entry field 163
troubleshooting tips (scanning) 45
TTM 212
turning 8525 off 17
turning 8525 on 17
TxQ (messages waiting to be sent) 176
typ (data stream type) 176
Type 194
Type (translate) 144
typing in upper case 224
U
UCC 128(Code 128) 134
underline
ASCII decimal equivalent 224
video attribute 208
Unicode values, entering 182
UPC A 136
UPC E 137
Upper (ANSI Host Char Set) 217
Upper Case 224
USB Setup Application C-1
installing usbstor &amp; wceusbsh inf C-4
launching C-1
updating usbstor &amp; wceusbsh inf C-2
usbstor.inf, installing C-4
usbstor.inf, updating C-2
Use Increment
X-Increment 194
Y-Increment 194
Use increment 194
user permissions
Exit 192
Font Change 192
Screen Switch 192
User security level 59
V
Valid Numerics (TESS) 232
Variations (Code 128) 134
vehicle installation
cables 266
Verify 131
Version 249
Version (Scan-See) 249
version number – TESS 167
vertical tab (CTRL K) 213
video attributes 207–208, 231
All Fld Video 231
Blink 207, 231
Bold 207, 231
Reverse 207, 231
Underline 208
View IDs 194
viewport, mapping 245
visible fields match 223
V Match Chr 223
volume, adjusting 191
VT220 Function keys – equivalent Psion
Teklogix keyboard Function keys 171
W
Warm Reset (Shutdown menu) 66
warranty 4
wceusbsh.inf, installing C-4
wceusbsh.inf, updating C-2
WEC (Write Error Code) 238
Wi-Fi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key
(network authentication) 22
Wi-Fi Protected Access-WPA (network
authentication) 22
Window Delay (Polling) 103
Windows&reg; Start Menu See Start Menu 58
Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual XVII
Index
Windows CE
dialogue box 66
files, folders, &amp; programs, working
with 55
Windows CE, navigating in 53
Windows Explorer 62
wireless connection setup 19
Wireless Information Tab 20
Wireless Properties tab 21
worldwide offices 4
WPA (network authentication) 22
WPA-PSK (network authentication) 22
wrap, auto 215
Wraparound 248
Write Error Code (WEC) 238
802.IQ v1(protocol)
Auto Radio Addr 186
802.IQ v2 251
802.1X authentication, enabling 23
802.11b radio, configuring 19
8525
approvals 274
off-line 169
specifications 273
9010t connection (TESS) 219
X
xa (transmitted acknowledgements) 175
xi (transmitted initialize messages) 175
X-Increment 194
xm (transmitted messages) 175
Xmit Count 209
Xmit Enter 214
Xmit key 211
Xmit Modes 209–212
Xmit Wait 209
x origin 218, 232, 233
xr (retransmissions) 176
Y
Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling
179, 180
Y-Increment 194
y origin 218, 232, 233
1D internal scanner 46
132-col. font 207
2392 Telnet See Emulation - 2392 Telnet
233
3274 Telnet See Emulation - 3274 Telnet
235
5250 emulation keys 162
5250 Telnet See Emulation - 5250 Telnet
238
7 bit parameter 210
80-col. font 207
802.IQ connection (ANSI) 202
802.IQ connection (TESS) 219
XVIII Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual
">

Здравейте! Аз съм AI чатбот, специално обучен да ви помага с Psion Teklogix 8525/8530 Vehicle-Mount Computer User Manual. Аз съм прегледал подробно документа и мога да ви помогна да намерите точната информация, която ви е необходима, или да обясня съдържанието на ясен и прост език. Независимо дали търсите насоки за конкретни функции, стъпки за отстраняване на неизправности или обща употреба, не се колебайте да задавате своите въпроси. Колкото повече подробности предоставите за вашите притеснения или нужди, толкова по-точно и ефективно мога да ви помогна!

Асистентът пише

Асистентът не е на клавиатурата. Моля, опитайте отново по-късно.

Изглежда, че сте достигнали документ, който е написан на няколко езика, включително и такъв, който не е вашият роден език. Можете да използвате следните връзки, за да скриете временно страници без езика, който предпочитате.